Home

Samsung ProXpress

1. Select input type for Workform Input Status ja Scan E Completed Default G Box ____ Not Completed A Fax Not Completed Total 3 Input Modules Input Shows the workform s input module name Status shows the setting status To create a workform you have to set every mandatory items of the assigned input module After you do fill out all mandatory items the Save amp Execute and Save button are enabled Settings Configures the setting values for the module Next Goes to the next tab Transmit Tab IB Not Completed C 5 Fax Not Completed UI CI Box Not Completed 7 Server Not Completed Ww oe ee 66 C6 C6 6 63757 Total 4 Destination e Transmit Shows the workform s transmit module name e Status shows the setting status To create a workform you have to set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules After you do fill out all mandatory items the Save amp Execute and Save button are enabled e Add Module Add transmit module s Z Before you add module make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module e Fax See Preparing to fax on page 59 e Email Server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 Delete Deletes the selected module Settings Configures the setting values for the module Previous Goes to the next tab Next Goes to the nex
2. cc cece ccc ece ee eee nett ee eens eee teense ee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneaneeeennas 21 Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size 2222000042020 eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeegeaeeeeeeeneeeegs 21 WISI VV OMINOUS itp E EEE EE EAA A EPA ANG werent 22 LANGANE SONG Watermark wcgeymusaseveay cura ecnas Pe Fane tony erasers BRAND ere bey pure rene Pura Gm nina 22 creating a Watermark saa ty ose earn ANA NAGA Sarton ee nae tage a use ey ae eae sania Sars ners sete rsa 22 CITING a VV OLSEN ON a GAGANA NA AGA AG 22 Deleting a Watermark aap rrii a vanes aE a nd a A 22 USING OV E e PINANG E E E E E TU AA EEE E E E E E 23 Vial 1S an OVEN DN asa nars ENEE ETE 23 Creating a New Page Overlay 2222000002000 04 23 Using a Page OVEN Ay AA PNPA APR PP AA 23 Deleting a Page Overlay 222200 00 cece eee eee e nett eee e eee eed EE EEE ESD DE EEE SDSS DEES EE SSE SESE EDGES EE EEG SEES EES 23 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver PEER CNO pasa DA BANA NANANA INANG NAL TA NBA PAN TANGAN 24 AOV O ma BAN AN GG NGANGA 24 USING REID area eterno nen AA AA AA AG 24 5 Using Direct Printing Utility OVerview Direct PANONG WOWEY ANTE AA NADAANAN AANI 25 PEN O AA APA PA AA AP 25 From the Direct Printing Utility window 2220003 31 25 SIG Ba a 285 ale m0 pa Ce AA AA AA AA PA AA AA APA AA 25 USING The FIONE CIEK MENU ma NG AGANG NAGA NANA TA eisai S E enehe kaan 25 6 Sharing the Printer Locally seting Up a Host COMPUEET m
3. About Help Shows the status of the class and the number of m Selected class ce printers in the class musungg BECTAWNICS Exit e Refresh Renews the classes list e Add Class Allows you to add a new printer class e Remove Class Removes the selected printer class Scanners Configuration In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices change device properties and scan images x p Smera konAgarabinn 1 Switches to ts Aki Scanners H Shows all of the configuration k a installed scanners Shows the vendor model name and type of your scanner malik bed Sanne Werda i sf tag e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document See page 41 e Drivers Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers Ports Configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that Is stalled in busy State when its owner is terminated for any reason Unified Driver Configurator m Port configuration seceee idevimfpO devimfp1 idevimfp2 idevimfp3 moaaaa sw fdevinfpS J devinfp6 devinfn ldewmfp3 dewmfp3 Help semi ee Shows all of the available ports Switches to ports configuration Shows the port type device connected
4. WARNING Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire explosion electric shock or personal injury when using your laser MFP follow these basic safety precautions CAUTION Do NOT attempt Do NOT disassemble YTU Do NOT touch Follow directions explicitly Unplug the power plug from the wall socket Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock EAA Call the service center for help These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others Please follow them explicitly After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference a SSS CH bt gt ek lo eS ANE i 12 Read and understand all instructions Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information heed the safety information You may have misunderstood the operating instruction If you cannot resolve the conflict contact your sales or service representative for assistance Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and or telephone jack before cleaning Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners Use only a damp cloth for cleaning Do not place the machine on an unstable cart stand or table It may fall ca
5. You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in User Box 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Document Box Management 2 Ready NEL General Setup Print Report Document Box A Management Public Box Deletion Vv EY OPTION DESCRIPTION Public Box If you set this option to Administrators only only Deletion the administrator can delete the publicly stored boxes in User Box because the machine will asks the password of administrator STANDARD WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard workflow provides 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab 5 Standard Workflow Management 2 Ready DO General Print Report Optional Service a 3 z Sad Complete eens Auto Redirection Notification Management E Standard Workflow 077 Management Approve Default Fax Complete Report v EY OPTION DESCRIPTION Auto Redirection To create and execute a workform including the auto redirection feature enable this option Approve To create and execute a workform including the approval feature enable this option Complete Report To add
6. C Print to file Make sure that your j i Find Printer Printer printer is selected aAll Number of copies 1 F Selection Current Page Pages 1 65535 Collate Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 Select your printer driver from the Name drop down list To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window For details see Printer Settings on page 14 If you see Setup Printer or Options in your Print window click it instead Then click Properties on the next screen Click OK to close the printer properties window To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window Print 7 x General Select Printer g i Add Printer o Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Page Range All Number of copies a O Pages 1 65535 ol Enter either a single page number or a single page range For example 5 12 2 Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click OK Basic Printing 14 Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you n
7. Copying ID with the manual ID copy option If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper or adjust the copying position of the page follow the next steps Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people s driver s license cards 100mm X 80mm in one page 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup gt Mamual ID Copy Setup Press the number from the template list table Press Edit Template O oO A O Selec the appropriate option values and press OK e Template Name Enter the template name e Scan Position Select the position for scanning You should select the largest scanning position out of the originals LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 000mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 110mm Y 090mm e Number of Images Select how many images are on a page select number 4 e Image Position Select the position of a page which images are on If you choose to copy four images you have to select four positions here e First Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 100mm e Second Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 020mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 100mm Third Image Position LEFT TOP X 000mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 100mm Y 230mm e Forth Image Position LEFT TOP X 105mm Y 150mm RIGHT BOTTOM X 205mm Y 230mm 7 Press OK the template you have saved will be shown i
8. Modify HERE 5 x lt Modify contents j gt v Extract text and graphics Access Permission User Password pet v 4 Select an encryption level e Low RC4 40 bits Recommended for Acrobat 3 0 or later version e High RC4 128 bits Recommended for Acrobat 5 0 or later version e High AES 128 bits Recommended for Acrobat 7 0 or later version 5 Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF 6 Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the Access Permission menu below 7 Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying This configuration will affect the users accessed with the User Password 8 Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to extract text or graphics 9 Press OK Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Sharing and ee Jo __ polo ality _ Simple Scan __ Archival Record a Custom e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size e Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple docu
9. NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 5 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 7 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you w
10. NOTE The following procedure is based on Windows XP for other operating systems refer to the corresponding Windows user s guide or online help Installing Printer Software You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing To install the printer software on the computer perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on the printer in use A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with your printer The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the operating system you are using All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning installation Installing Software for Local Printing A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the printer cable supplied with your printer such as a USB or parallel cable If your printer is attached to a network skip this step and go to Installing Software for Network Printing on page 8 You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method NOTE If the New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click in the upper right corner of the box to close the window or click Cancel 5 Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into you
11. OPTION DESCRIPTION Multi Bin You can set the output mode for multiple bin from the following options e Job Seperator Stacks the printouts in each seperated bin in sequence by job e Collator Stacks the printouts in the same order as the originals e Stacker Stacks the printouts in bins one by one When bin 1 is full printouts will be stacked in bin 2 e such as bin 2 for copy job bin 4 for fax job etc Stamp You can print optional information such as ID Machine Information Date amp Time Comment and Page Number on the output paper for tracking e Items Select item s to print on each paper e Position Decide the position to stamp either Top or Bottom of paper e Appearance Decide the appearance of the text either Opaque or Transparent When you select Opaque the text background color is filled with opaque white COPY SETUP For copy output you can set up several options in advance 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Copy Setup 9 Ready General Print Report Page Number m hg Play t Time amp Date Copy Setup Fax Setup Network Setup Authentication 3 z ID Stamp Optional Service Vv M OPTION DESCRIPTION Manual ID Copy This option sets the ID copy settings such as the Setup number of images or
12. Standard Job r Delete Save Jl Save As Default Press F1 for Help Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections e mage Quality allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image e Scan Area allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select from the Job Type drop down list For details about the preset Job Type settings see page 42 You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar For further details about editing an image see page 42 10 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar 11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 12 Click Save Adding J ob Type Settings You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK Your setting is added to th
13. The selected PDF file is sent to the printer 26 Using Direct Printing Utility Sharing the Printer Locally You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer which is called host computer on the network The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Sharing the Printer Locally 21 Setting Up a Host Computer Start Windows From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes Double click your printer driver icon From the Printer menu select Sharing Check the Share this printer box a uh WN P Fill in the Shared Name field and then click OK Setting Up a Client Computer 1 Right click the Windows Start button and select Explore 2 Select My Network Places and then right click Search for Computers 3 Fillin the IP address of host computer in Computer name field and click Search In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of host computer account 4 Double click Printers and Faxes 5 Right click printer driver icon select Connect 6 Click Yes if the installation confirm message app
14. 12 bits Internal for Gray scale Grayscale 256 levels am to the applications for scanning the maximum resolution might iffer b JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS OPTIONAL First copy out Scanner glass Less than 5 seconds time e DADF Less than 8 seconds Copy resolution Scan up to 600 x 300 text text photo up to 600 x 600 photo e Print up to 600 x 600 text text photo up to 1 200 x 1 200 photo Zoom rate e Scanner glass 25 to 400 e DADF 25 to 200 Item Description Compatibility ITU T G3 Super G3 Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or behind PABX Data coding MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Tx only Modem speed 33 6 Kbps Multiple copies 1 to 999 pages a Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS Transmission speed Up to 3 seconds page Maximum document length e Scanner glass 356 mm 14 inches e Duplex automatic document glass 356 mm 14 inches Item Description Compatibility TWAIN standard WIA standard Scanning method DADF and Flat bed Color CCD Charge Coupled Device module TWAIN standard 1 200 x 1 200 dpi Up to 4 800 x 4 800 dpi by software enhancement Resolution Resolution e Standard 203 x 98 dpi e Fine 203 x 196 dpi e Super Fine 300 x 300 dpi 406 x 392 dpi 203 x 392
15. 4 5 6 NOTE If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel Click Scan and then scan driver is opened Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture Click Scan button on the Scanners and Cameras Wizard Windows 7 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 32 Scanning Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound 5 Devices and Printers Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes Start Scan New Scan application appears Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture Click Scan Using Smart Panel Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the Status of the printer and allows you to customize the printer s settings If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer software If you are a Linux OS user download Smart Panel from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install NOTES e To use this program you need To check for Operating System s that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide Mac OS X 10 3 or higher Linux To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your printer refer to Printer Specifications in your Prin
16. Automatic resending Redialing the last number Delaying a fax transmission Sending a priority fax Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission Receiving a fax Changing the receive modes Receiving manually in Telephone mode Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone Receiving in secure receiving mode Receiving faxes in memory Adjusting the document settings Duplex Resolution Original Type Darkness Erase Background Color Mode Setting up a fax phonebook Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No Storing Group fax numbers Group No Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service Using the polling option Storing the originals for polling Printing Deleting the polling document Polling a remote fax Printing a report after sending a fax Sending a fax in toll save time contents USING USB MEMORY DEVICE USING DOCUMENT BOX USING STANDARD WORKFLOW 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 74 19 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job Forwarding a received fax to other destination Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server Setting up the end Fax tone About USB memory
17. Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Toner cartridge is not installed Install it Toner cartridge is worn Replace with new one Toner is empty Replace toner cartridge Toner is low Order new toner cartridge Too much paper in finisher stacker Remove printed paper Too much paper in output bin tray Remove printed paper Use Auxiliary Access The toner cartridge is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not properly connected The toner cartridge is at the end of its life When the toner cartridge replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays The lifespan of the toner cartridge which the arrow indicates is reached Try to reinstall the toner cartridge Rplace a toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 This message appears when the toner is completely empty and your machine stops printing Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 The toner cartridge is almost empty The stacker is full of printouts The printed papers are full on the output tray The credit is not enough to access the job according to Foreign Device Ensure a replacement cartridge is in stock Remove
18. Lift up the document input tray and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 97 Pull jammed paper from the stacker exit Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 103 Paper has jammed in the fuser area Paper jammed in the stacker Paper Misfed from multi purpose tray Paper misfed from tray Or paper has jammed in the tray feed area Or the tray cover is opened Paper jammed in the stacker Clear the jam See In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge on page 103 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b Clear the jam See In the multi purpose tray on page 102 Clear the jam See In the tray 1 on page 99 and see In the optional tray on page 100 and see In the optional high capacity feeder on page 101 Open the stacker door and remove jammed paper by lowering guide 1a or 1b MESSAGE Paper Jam inside of duplex path Paper Jam inside of machine Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred Shake toner cartridge Staple cartridge is empty Replace it Staple cartridge is not installed Install it in finisher System error zzz Please turn off then on This IP address conflicts with an IP address already in use Check it Toner cartridge is not compatible Check user s guide MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS MESSAGE MEANING
19. Machine Setup button Basic tab Page 59 Address Duplex Resolution Advanced tab Page 60 Original Size Delay Send Priority Send Polling Image tab Page 60 Original Type Darkness Erase Background Color Mode Scan to Email Basic tab Page 50 Advanced tab Page 50 Image tab Page 51 Output tab Page 51 NetScan Scan to Server Basic tab Page 50 Advanced tab Page 50 Image tab Page 51 Output tab Page 51 Public tab Page 91 Detail Edit Delete Delete All Print Secured tab Page 91 Detail Edit Delete Delete All Print USB Format USB Print Scan to USB Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel the screen displays three menus Machine Status shows the supplies life billing counters and reports Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status Page 79 Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Fuser Kit Feed Roller Kit Feed Roller Kit Bypass Tray Document Feeder Roller BTR Kit DADF Friction Pad Kit Page 79 Machine Details Customer Support Machine Serial Number IP Address Hardware Options Configuration Software Versions Tray Status Tray Status Paper Size Paper Type Print Report System Report Scan Report Fax Report Supplies Life tab Machine Info
20. Protocol option This option provides packet transmission and routing functionality for networking Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values 802 1x You can select the user authentication for network communication For details information consult the network administrator IPv6 Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements e IPv6 Activate When you select On the Host Name and Link Local Address will automatically be entered into the address field e DHCPv6 Configuration If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network you can set one of the option for default dynamic host configuration e Routers Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router e DHCPv6 Addresses Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request e DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request 84 Machine status and advanced setup SECURITY This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data or change the password 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Security 2 Ready a A Naga General Print Report Copy Setup DM Access Control Information Hiding Fax Setup Print Setup Log Network Setup Change Admin Security Password ma Access Contro
21. The following are some constraints about the document box You can create maximum 100 document boxes e A document box can contain up to 200 stored documents e The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters e Common Ce box is already created by default Add Box Box Name Untitled Owner Unknown Secured Box e Box Name Enter a box name e Owner Enter the user name of the box s owner e Secured Box Check to make a secured type box e New Password Enter a new password to access the box e Confirm Password Enter the password again Edit a Box Screen You can modify a box name or an owner name To modify a Document Box select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit Box Name Flower Owner K s Favorite e Box Name Enter a new box name e Owner Enter a user name of a box Document List Screen You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box screen you can use the stored documents again p3 2 Document Box gt User Box gt UserBoxName Second Second 11 27 2008 26 M Third Third 11 27 2008 27 Fourth Fourth 11 27 2008 28 Fifth Fifth 11 27 2008 29 Free 637 8000 MB Selected 1 Total 10 8000 mana Ka Document Name Shows the document s name Owner Shows the user name of a document Date Shows the date of a document stored Page Shows the number of total pages in t
22. ag 7 Select the destination SMB server Z You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP servers 8 Press Start on the control panel The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file And therefore you can send the document with a single access to the server When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users 1 Press Scan from the Main screen Press Scan to Server 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 50 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build 5 Press On to enable job build function 2 Ready to scan your Job Build segment Di Advanced Image Job Build 0 Pages A Original Size L re La On Display Between Segments Vv e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop e Delete Deletes a segment e Delete All Deletes all segments e Send All Prints all segments e Add Segment Adds a new segment e Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job 6
23. gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK E i _ Text Photo Photo e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK m Color Je mm Mono e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode 56 _Scanning Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right arrow to make the output darker Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light Dark el CODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appro
24. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media It consists of a hot roller and a back up roller After toner
25. Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers T In the multi purpose tray pull the paper out of the machine If the paper is not feeding properly 1 2 Open and close the side cover Printing automatically resumes 5 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine A M UN Q Son DIANA Soe Pm or if you do not see the paper If the paper does not move when you pull in this area stop and go to step 6 stop and go to step 6 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown Pull it out gently and slowly in If you do not see any paper in this area order to avoid tearing the paper g 102 _Troubleshootin In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge Z The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the side cover 3 Close the side cover In the paper exit area 1 Open the side cover 2 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area In the duplex unit area If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly paper jam may occur Make sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly 1 Open the side cover 2 Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily Troubleshooting_ 103 5 Close the stacker front cover Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s Open the stacker front cover duplex i 2 Pull the stacker lever 1a down If
26. Press Add From Scan Name Untitled SS Owner Unknown _ Duplex 1 Sided aaa Resolution 300 dpi Original Size Auto eee ae 6 Set the scan settings 7 Press Start to begin scanning Storing documents during copy scan fax function During copying scanning or faxing you can save the scanned originals to Document Box in your machine 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 2 Press Copy gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box Or press Scan gt Scan to Email Scan to Server or Scan to PC gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box Or press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Saving to box Saving to box 3 Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard Then press OK lt J jee dee Jc Pe Pre a a a a a a a aa EC PAA IE a AA a asssaaa E pe Symbols 4 Select a destination box and press OK 5 Press Start from the control panel to begin a job Using document box 75 using standard workflow This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine This chapter includes e About Standard Workflow e Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen ABOUT STANDARD WORKFLOW Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with pre arranged task sets called workform Standard Workflo
27. See Loading originals on page 32 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Booklet Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e 1 Sided Original Copies on one side of the paper e 2Sided Original Copies on both sides of the paper 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying oe Sh Z This feature is possible only with A4 Letter Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 and Statement sized paper Cover copying The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Covers Z Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto you cannot use this feature 5 Press On to use this feature and select detailed settings for each option e Position Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front back or both e Cover Sheet Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided 2 sided or blank paper e Paper Source Select the paper tray where the cover sheet is loaded 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Tran
28. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a click 12 Close the front cover then the side cover N After replacing the toner cartridge wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine MAINTENANCE PARTS To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired ITEMS YIELD AVERAGE DADF rubber pad Approx 50 000 pages Multi purpose tray rubber pad Approx 50 000 pages DADF feed roller Approx 250 000 pages Multi purpose tray feed roller Approx 200 000 pages Transfer roller Approx 125 000 pages Fuser unit Approx 250 000 pages Paper Feed roller Approx 250 000 pages We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after their lifespan 96 Maintenance MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE WEBSITE If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via Samsung s SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to View
29. Understanding the USB screen Plugging in a USB memory device Scanning to an USB memory device Scanning Scan to USB Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab Changing the scan feature settings Duplex Resolution Original Size Original Type Color Mode Darkness Erase Background Scan to Edge Quality Scan Preset File Format File Policy Printing from a USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device About Document Box Understanding the Document box screen Document Box Screen Box Adding Screen Edit a Box Screen Document List Screen Storing documents to Document box Storing documents from document box Storing documents during copy scan fax function About Standard Workflow Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen Workflow Screen Workform Creating Screen Various Operations with Workform Scan to multi destination Fax forwarding Auto redirection Delayed start feature 15 contents 16 MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 101 102 Notification feature Approval feature Machine Setup Machine Status screen Admin Setting screen Browsing the machine s status General settings Copy Setup Fax Setup Network Setup Security Access Control Log Change Admin Password Information Hiding Optional Service Document Box Management Standard Workflow Management Printing a report Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Findi
30. Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Authentication gt Authentication Method Select Kerberos SMB or LDAP Z Before configuring network authentication you need to configure External Authentication Server from Security gt Network Security Click on the Apply button Click on Authority and check the Role Name according to the current user s role Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button 7 Click on User Profile and check the users e You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button e If you want add the information to Address Book check the Automatically add your information to Address Book option e Select the user s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated e Select the user s role from Role 8 Click Apply Enabling network authentication by Kerberos 1 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 2 Select Security 5 Network Security 5 External Authentication Server 5 Kerberos Server Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers Enter the realm used for Kerberos login Select the IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 88 7 You can add a backup do
31. You can select output options for your document See Printing a Document on page 13 for more information about accessing the printer properties Click the Extras tab to access the following feature kalog Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Watermark No Watermark v Edit Overlay No Overlay v Edit Output Options Print Subset Normal 1 2 3 v Information Page ata 8 50 x 11 00 in J Use Printer Fonts C mm inch Save as Form for Overlay 5 Copies 1 Resolution 600 dpi Favorites Job Setting Printer Default X ELECTRONICS ai Watermark You can create a background text image to be printed on each page of your document For details see Using Watermarks on page 22 Overlay Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper For details see Using Overlays on page 23 Output Options e Print Subset You can set the sequence in which the pages print Select the print order from the drop down list Normal 1 2 3 Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the last page Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 Your printer prints all pages from the last page to the first page Print Odd Pages Your printer prints only the odd numbered pages of the document Print Even Pages Your printer prints only the even numbered pages of the document e Staple Do the stapling on the printouts e Request Offset If you want the p
32. You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Printers Configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers Tab You can see the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window Unified Driver Configurator Switches to Printer configuration lt Shows all of the installed printer Shows the status aaa model name and URI of your printer ne You can use the following printer control buttons e Refresh renews the available printers list e Add Printer allows you to add a new printer e Remove Printer removes the selected printer e Set as Default sets the current printer as a default printer Stop Start stops starts the printer e Test allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly e Properties allows you to view and change the printer properties For details see page 39 Using Your Printer in Linux 38 Classes Tab The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes hi Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration 1 Printers Classes NG ING S 4 Refresh Add Class Remove Class Ss N Shows all of the printer classes Stop Properties
33. gt User Access Control gt User Profile menu Network Authentication It enables the network authentication mode When the users already belong to a server based networks the Network Authentication system can be simply configured with the existing server Then the user can access with the ID and password stored in the remote authentication server To use any features in Network Authentication mode the users have to get a certificate from SMB FTP LDAP or Keberos server defined in SyncThru Web Service Authentication Method Continue Foreign Device Interface When you install the optional FDI kit select Foreign Device Interface Configuration Setup to activate it e Job Timer If there is not enough credit you can set the machine to cancel a job right away or wait a designated amount of time for a deposit e Print Job Control When it is enabled the both computer printing and copying are possible since the credit remains With Disable only the copy printing job needs the credit which means a computer printing a report or a fax job needs no credits e Inhibit Services When no credit is left the machine disables the copy job only with Copy Only With All Services scanning service and copy job are disabled e Internal Credits It is used when you cancel the job or when the job is cancelled by the device due to insufficient credits coin or is canceled by user s request If you
34. or thick paper Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Layout tab select the paper orientation 3 From the Double sided Printing section select the binding option you want 4 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and type 5 Click OK and print the document NOTE If your printer does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The printer prints every other page of the document first After printing the first side of your job the Printing Tip window appears Follow the on screen instructions to complete the printing job Advanced Printing 21 Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document You can change the size of a page s content to appear larger or smaller on the printed page 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Paper tab select Reduce Enlarge in the Printing Type drop down list 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the w or 4 button 4 Select the paper source size and type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size This printer feature allows you to scale your pr
35. the page The toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Specification on print media on page 34 If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver and refer to Software section respectively A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative Toner specks AaBbCc AabBbGc AaBbCc AaBbCe AaRbCc The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Specification on print media on page 34 The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Dropouts AaBbCc AaBbUc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots
36. your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 4 Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common Macintosh problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 7 It will take longer to print when 4 you print a PDF file as an image Refer to Mac OS User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages Troubleshooting 117 ordering supplies and accessories This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine This chapter includes e Supplies e Accessories Z The optional parts or features may differ by countries Contact your sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your country SUPPLIES How to purchase ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out you can order the following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine Optional tray 2 3 4 If you are experiencing paper supply problems frequently you can attach an additional 520 sheet tray You can print
37. 200 x 1 200 dpi Effective output Boot up time Less than 35 seconds from sleep mode The boot up time will be longer if data volume is a lot in the HDD Printer language PCL 6 PS 3 PDF Direct V1 4 TIFF JPEG Operating environment Temperature 10 C to 32 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH OS compatibility e PCL Driver Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 7 Server 2008 R2 e PS Driver Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 7 Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS 10 3 10 6 Display wVGA 800 x 480 x RGV color Toner cartridge Average Cartridge Yield 25 000 standard pages alab Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC ya 19752 Interface High Speed USB 2 0 Device x1 High Speed USB 2 0 HOST Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX 123 Specifications a Print speed will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connect on method media type media size and job complexity b Please visit www samsungprinter com to download the latest software version COPIER SPECIFICATIONS Item Description Copy speed Up to 53 ppm in A4 55 ppm in Letter Duplex copy e Simplex to Duplex 1 2 Up to 50 ipm in A4 speed 52 ipm in Letter e Duplex to Duplex 2 2 Up to 35 ipm in A4 37 ipm in Letter Item Description Color bit depth e Internal 36 bits e External 24 bits Mono bit depth 1 bit for Linearity 4 Halftone 8 bits External
38. 5 In the Create Overlay window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover 6 Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List box 7 Click OK or Yes to finish creating The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive NOTE The overlay document size must be the same as the documents you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Advanced Printing 23 Using a Page Overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document l Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 3 Click the Extras tab 4 Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop down list box 5 If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay list click Edit button and Load Overlay and select the overlay file If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load Overlay window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary click Confirm Page Overlay When Printing If this box is checked a messag
39. 81 94 81 management 81 Supplies Management 81 SyncThru Web Service email address 51 fax settings 65 SMB FTP setting 54 System timeout 29 T telephone 62 terminal ID 82 TIFF 57 71 toner cartridge 18 toner reorder notification 91 touch screen problem solving 108 tray adjusting the width and length 36 optional tray 18 tray1 18 U USB flash memory printing 72 scanning 69 74 75 using SetIP 30 W Windows problems 115 131 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site ALBANIA 42 27 5755 www samsung com ANGOLA 91 726 7864 www samsung com ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG www samsung com 7267864 0 07 min AZERBAIJAN 088 55 55 555 www samsung com BAHRAIN 8000 4726 www samsung com ae English www samsung com ae _ar Arabic BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com BELGIUM 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be _fr French BOLIVIA 800 10 7260 www samsung com BOSNIA 05 133 1999 www samsung com BOTSWANA 0800 726 000 www samsung com BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www sam
40. Cc or message input field the keyboard shows on the display screen The following explanation is the example that you are entering abcdefg abc com 1 Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email Advanced From abc def com Address Resolution Subject ed 300 dpi pry Message File Name v Press a b c d e f g Press Press a b c Press and press c O m Mioa o to enter contents in other fields press 8 From j gt on the keyboard 6 Press OK after finishing all the contents SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SAMSUNG NETWORK SCAN MANAGER NETSCAN You can scan an image on the machine via the Network Scan program which is installed in your networked computer Preparation for network scanning Make sure the printer software is installed on your computer using the Printer Software CD ROM since the printer software and should include the Network Scan program See Fax option kit on page 118 for detailed information on installation steps 1 In Windows select Start 5 Programs 5 Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt Network Scan gt Network Scan The Samsung Network Scan Manager window opens 2 Click the Add Device button Click Next 4 Select Connect to this scanner and enter the IP address of your machine Or select Browse for a scanner recommended to show a list of scanners on your network 5 Click Next 6 Select your m
41. Configurator 2NG ANAN GAAN 37 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator ccccccccce eee e eee ee eeseeeeeessaeeeeeesgeeeeeeageaneneesagngs 37 PEIMECES CONNGUKA DON castrate ecunt ae reas deipe teense BAGAN NAA ANNA dm Na 38 oy Ore a Ara gm Oe a6 Ug TON aa AA APAN AA ee 38 PORES COR URALIOD Haran NPA PATONG PAG AGE PAANAN ness EEE TEETE TET 39 Configuring Printer Properes srenaccncmanaiestanedeiant NA eLetter iets NUN GAN 39 PEONO a DOCUMEND Ka NAGA AA AN ANAN EE AA 40 PRIMING KON AA DOIICAHIONS naa ANA ADAN NG GAAN cactus 40 PARANG NEO GANA NAN ANA AA 40 Scan a DOCUMENT maa 41 Using the Image Manager AA AA PAP AA 42 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh HaCicci ate BS Ac AA AA PAA 43 Printer GIVE mathaaaa Kaban ANNA AN Taga TAW BAAL TALATA DNA ATAT D YAN Eh PANEL GL EDYAT cated davedeiaitersuevaines ies 43 Cane WOE sand ik ama ANA AA ANA AA AA AN 44 Setting Up the Printer spine pa pA NAINA GIKRA NGA ARENA AN A denice EE duane yaaa nau AE paula Ri 44 For a Network connected 2 ce cece cece maa Aa 44 FOr a USB connecteqd 7a GAGA AGA GAGA AA 45 PAOU Aa eas 46 PANUNG a DOUEN AABANG 46 CPangINd FENCE SENO aaa aa a rineweein eins Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet Of Paper 2200000000004 asaan DUPLEX PHDUNO Maahas NANANA ATA AN GG ANN AA AN Scanning Installing Printer Software in Windows This chapter includes e Installing Printer Software e Reinstalling Printer Software e Removing Printer Software
42. Copy menu from the main screen Analog Fax After installing the fax kit select this option Enable to use this machine as a fax machine Scan to Email Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from the scan screen Show Own All information in Job Status is Information displayed to the owner Only Hiding Method Char Counts Of Instead of the job name and Setting Information owner s name in Job Status you can see a sequence of asterisks characters NetScan Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it via network Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from the scan screen Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from the scan screen Fixed Counts The job name and owner s name Except First in Job Status display as many as Char entered number of asterisks except the first character Manual Image Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information Set this option to Enable go to the General tab gt Manual Image Overwrite press Start in the display to start the overwriting job Fixed Counts The job name and owner s name in Job Status display as many as entered number of asterisks 7 Automatic Image Overwrite If you select Enable the machine renews the HDD memory when you save new job on it 88 Machine status and advanced setup DOCUMENT BOX MANAGEMENT
43. Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without 5 prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 6 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 7 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
44. Driver Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or I mage Manager NOTE Installing the driver in the text mode e If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver installation you have to use the driver in the text mode e Follow the step 1 to 3 then type root localhost Linux install sh than follow the instruction on the terminal screen Then the installation completes e When you wan to uninstall the driver follow the installation instruction above but type root localhost Linux uninstall sh on the terminal screen Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver 1 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 2 Click the ill icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh 3 Click Uninstall 4 Click Next Uninstallation of Unified Linux Driver You are about to uninstall the Unified Linux Driver Press Ne
45. Enter the password and click OK Click Continue O 60 NOU A Select Uninstall from the Installation Type and then Click Uninstall 10 Click Continue 11 When the uninstallation is done click Restart 44 Setting Up the Printer Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the printer to your computer the network cable or the USB cable For a Network connected NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Before connecting your printer make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 43 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List eFor MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the Rendezvous tab eFor MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the Bonjour eFor MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the Bonjour The name of your machine appears on the list Select SECOOOxxxxxxxxx from the printer box where the XXXXXXXXxX varies depending on your machine 5 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model a
46. JobOwner 3 Copy 004 Copy JobJobName_4 Scanning JobOwner_4 Copy 005 Copy JobJobName_5 Scanning JobOwner_5 Copy KI Current Job tab Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending Completed Job tab Provides the list of completed jobs Active Notice tab Displays any error codes that have occurred No Gives the order of jobs The job in No 001 is currently in progress Job Name Shows job information like name and type Status Gives the current status of each job User Provides user name mainly computer name Job Type Displays details of the active job such as job type recipient phone number and other information Delete Removes the selected job from the list Delete All Removes all the jobs from the list Detail Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the Active Notice list Close Closes the job status window and switches to previous view Power Saver button When the machine is not in use save electricity with the provided power save mode Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode See Using energy saving feature on page 29 If you press this button for more than two seconds a window appears requesting that you turn the power off If you choose Yes the power is turned off This button can also be used to turn the button on STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is not in the power save mode Blue On The machine is in the low power save mode Blink The machine is i
47. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine s memory and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain LDAP server Through the SyncThru Web Service you can easily enter and store email addresses from your computer Individual 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Address Book 5 Click Add 6 When the Add E Mail screen appears select the Speed No from 1 to 500 enter User Name and E mail Address Click Apply 8 Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Local gt the Individual tab Group Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book Click Address Book gt E mail Groups Click Add Group Enter Group Name and Speed No Add Individual addresses to the e mail group Click Apply Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your machine by pressing Group Da eee SSS Global Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are processed by the LDAP server 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Log in to the web site as an administrator See Managing your machine f
48. Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 63 OPTION DESCRIPTION Toll Save Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time for saving See Sending a fax in toll save time on page 66 Send Batch The machine asks you whether you want to add the documents to the reserved delay fax if the fax number you have dialed is same as the delay fax number See Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job on page 66 Received Fax Printing When receiving a fax containing pages longer than the paper loaded in the tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If this feature is set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages If you set this option to On and set the discard size to 10mm and the received data is longer then the currently set paper in the tray the machine minuses the data that would have been on the specified discard segment Fax Forward Settings You can forward a sent or received fax to other destination by a fax or an email See Forwarding a received fax to other destination on page 66 Fax Ending Sound This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on or off Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end of fax receiving See Setting up the end Fax tone on page 67 Redial The machine can automatically redial
49. Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file And therefore you can send the document with a single email When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users 1 Press Scan from the Main screen 2 Press Scan to Email 3 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 50 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build 5 Press On to enable the job build function pi Ready to scan your Job Build segment Nf Advanced Job Build 0 Pages A j baal gt Original Size Display Between Segments Vv e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep sending email or stop Delete Deletes a segment Delete All Deletes all segments Send All Prints all segments Add Segment Adds a new segment Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job 6 Press Add Segment 7 Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 8 Press Start to start the scanning job 9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains you can add segments without any
50. Settings tab and set the Tray option of the Installable Options section to Installed The optional tray The printer driver is not selected in has not been the driver configured to recognize the optional tray Common Linux problems POSSIBLE PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION The machine It might take Try to print with the latest does not staple correctly when longer to print when you print a Adobe Reader program or print with turning on Print as CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS printing more PDF file as an Image option from Acrobat than one cop image printing options It might take f Acrob As longer to print when you print kanina re a PDF file as an image collate option only in Window Macintosh The machine Turning off If you want to use the does not staple correctly when printing more than one copy with a collate option only in Linux collation options on applications including CUPS pstops collation option may solve this problem collation option go to printer driver s advanced option and turn the collation on Common Windows problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the StartUp Group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool32 or Illegal Operation
51. THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER NOTIFICATION You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is almost over and needs to be reordered 1 2 3 4 5 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Reorder Notification Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not and press Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level Press OK SENDING THE TONER REORDER NOTIFICATION You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to be reordered 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Press the General tab gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification 91 Maintenance Cleaning your machine Maintaining the Toner cartridge Maintaining the imaging unit Maintenance Parts Managing your machine from the website 4 Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not and press Toner Low Alert Level to set the remained life level 5 Press OK CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job Press Document Box on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press E to go to the Main screen 2 Ready nt One Template must be
52. Tray Tray n Type Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If not print quality may not be acheived as you want Thick Paper 24 Ib to 28 Ib 90 105 g m thick paper Thin Paper 16 Ib to 19 Ib 60 70 g m thin paper Cotton 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m cotton paper such as Gilbert 25 and Gilbert 100 Plain Paper Normal plain paper Select this type if your printer Is monochrome and printing on the 16 Ib 60 g m cotton paper Recycled Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m recycled paper Color Paper 20 Ib to 24 Ib 75 90 g m color backgrounded paper Archive Paper If you need to keep print out for a long period time such as archives select this option First Page This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type from the rest of the document You can select the paper source for the first page For example load thick stock for the first page into the Multi purpose Tray and plain paper into Tray n Then select Tray n in the Source option and Multi Purpose Tray in the First Page option If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature Scaling Printing Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale your print job on a page You can choose from None Reduce Enlarge and Fit to Page e For details see Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document on page 2
53. Using the WIA Driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images without using additional software NOTE The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Server 2003 Vista 7 with USB port Windows XP Server 2003 1 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass From the Start menu on your desktop window select Settings Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture Click Next Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer Windows Vista 1 NOTE To view scanners user can click on View scanners Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound 5 Scanners and Cameras Click on Scan a document or picture Then Windows Fax and Scan application is opened automatically and cameras
54. WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyr
55. Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM When you select an option in printer properties you may see an exclamationmark or mark An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and j mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application program you are using Refer to the User s Guide of your software application for the exact printing procedure 13 Basic Printing 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window is displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application The basic print settings are selected within the Print window These settings include the number of copies and print range amp Print PX General L Select Printer gt B g Add Printer i L i 7 Mi
56. a document select this option Advanced Options You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Options button e TrueType Options This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document Download as Outline When this option is selected the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored resident on your printer If after printing a document you find that the fonts did not print correctly choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Download as Bitmap When this option is selected the driver will download the font data as bitmap images Documents with complicated fonts such as Korean or Chinese or various other fonts will print faster in this setting Print as Graphics When this option is selected the driver will download any fonts as graphics When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts printing performance speed may be enhanced in this setting Print All Text To Black When the Print All Text To Black option is checked all text in your document prints solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen 17 Basic Printing Extras Tab
57. a fax at a later time without your intervention See Delaying a fax transmission on page 61 e Priority Send Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations See Sending a priority fax on page 62 e Polling Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender s absence or vice versa In order to use the polling function the originals must be previously stored in the machine See Using the polling option on page 65 e Back Returns to the Basic tab Image tab 2 Ready to Fax KY Basic Advanced Original Type Text Darkness nongi Erase Background Off ee Color Mode Mono E E E e Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned See Original Type on page 63 e Darkness Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax See Darkness on page 63 e Erase Background Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals See Erase Background on page 64 e Color Mode Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color See Color Mode on page 64 e Back Returns to the Basic tab 60 _Faxing Optional SENDING A FAX This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission When you place the originals you can use either the DADF or the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 If the originals are placed on both the DADF
58. a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set the number of redial attempts and an interval between attempts Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the machine will not use this feature Caller ID If you have set this option the machine remembers the last twenty fax numbers Speaker Volume This controls the sound when a fax actually starts to transfer data If this option is On the machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes With Comm the machine sounds only until the communication is succeeded No sound with Off option Prefix Dial This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five digits This number will be dialed before any automatic number is dialed User may set this to access a PABX example 9 or area code number example 02 When sending a fax there may be a job which has same recipient s number in delay jobs In this case the machine can send faxes to the same recipient in a batch Junk Fax Setup The machine does not accept faxes sent from remote stations if their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers You can enter a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers Press Junk Fax Setup and Edit then enter the fax numer If you have set Caller ID enabled you can browse the last received fax numbers and select a fax number from the list Ring Volume This feature adjusts the ring volume When you select Off the machine does not ring Dial Tone Volume Whe
59. an entry from Speed Dial List and press Add Repeat this step until you added entries you need 2 Ready to Fax Le Naya Group Dial Edit G000 1 a Jad Speed Dial List m 199 Hydi12345 199 Hydi12345 24 Delhi 12345 24 Delhi 12345 23 Singapore 12345 22 Ooty 12345 21 Germany 12345 Uy 20 Paris 12345 xy Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane Group list 7 Press OK to save the numbers Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer using SyncThru Web Service Individual 1 Open the web browser in your computer 2 Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Address Book gt Individual Press Add Enter Name Speed No and Fax Number Press Apply O HI eS Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an csv file Group 1 Open the web browser in your computer 2 Enter IP address of your machine then SyncThru Web Service shows Example http 123 123 123 123 Press Address Book gt Group Press Add Group Enter Group Name and Speed No Add individual ddresses to the fax group Press Apply SS O USING THE POLLING OPTION Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document This is useful when the person with the original document is no
60. and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DADF first which has higher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Machine ID amp Fax No 4 Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number 5 Press OK Sending a fax 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 4 Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper select 2 Sided with left right arrows in the Duplex feature 5 When the cursor is blinking in the input line enter the fax number using the number keypad on the control panel Or use Address on the right side of the screen if you have stored frequently used fax numbers Fax No 919986187 Basic Advanced 1011012345678 a BAE S 2 123456789 Individual Group C S 4 lt S 5 6 Resolution O lt 7 lt Standard j gt 6 To add a number press Add No 7 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinati
61. and turn the machine on Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties After installing the memory module you need to select it in the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it 1 S oS Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your computer For details about installing the PS printer driver see Software section Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers Select the Samsung SCX 6x55 Series PS printer Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties Select Device Settings Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the Installable Options section Click OK REPLACING THE STAPLER When the stapler is completely empty the message for installing the staple cartridge appears on the display screen 1 Open the finisher cover 3 Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit 4 Unpack the new staple cartridge Installing accessories_ 121 5 Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit T Close the finisher cover ENABLING FAX
62. copying positions manually See Copying ID with the manual ID copy option on page 44 82 _Machine status and advanced setup FAX SETUP This m achine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup pi Ready General Setup Print Report Copy Setup A Machine ID amp H Fax Initial a Fax No Setup Secure Receive Fax Setup Network Setup Receive Start Received Fax ta Code Ring to Answer Printing Authentication Error Correction a Onna E Mode E Receive Header Redial KO TI el Z The fax options are different from country to country depending on the international communication regulatory If the display screen does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained herein it means that the grayed out function does not supported in your communication environment OPTION DESCRIPTION Mach No ine ID amp Fax Enter the machine ID and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page Select the country name This option usually pre set for user Receive Start Code This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT s
63. enter Job Name the machine assigns the job name as Fax Send Job xxx xxx number are set in order Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent You can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current time For example if it is 1 00 then you can set the time starting from 1 15 If the set time is incorrect the warning message will appear and the machine resets it to the current time 7 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory Z To cancel delaying a fax press Off before sending is activated Faxing Optional _ 61 Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Priority Send Press On Press OK Press Start to start the urgent fax job oe O ye Sm Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission When the machine enters power s
64. from the drop down list 8 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer Click Next g Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer Typical installation for 3 inetwork printer Recscveenvocsccesvevebosncececeaesosssocscesnseasooenset Install softwares for a device that is on network C Custom installation fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name kad i 2 Update lt Back Cancel e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration pa
65. glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click SNS Upload from the home screen 3 Click Scan to SNS gt Start 4 Click Scan Upload Existing File 1 Click SNS Upload from the home screen 2 Click Existing File to SNS gt Start 3 Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload 4 Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next 5 Follow the instructions in each social networking site NOTE If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due to a network environment issue it s needed to check security limitations established in your network with network administrator To guarantee correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication Converting to an E Book Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen 3 Click Scan to E Book Start 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name and select a save location 5 Click Save Convert Existing Files 1 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen 2 Click Existing File to E Book gt Start 3 Click Add Image to find the file to convert 4 Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name an
66. in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detail information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use other kind of scan application refer to the Help for application encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurred try to release the port The machine does not appear on the scanners list Check if your machine is attached to your computer Make sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Check if the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is
67. is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except f
68. is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper I Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper For instance if you print 6 sheet of original papers every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a paper and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on the back side of a paper The information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 Bili 1 Gt e Reverse 2 gt 2 Sided Scans the both sides of originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the back sides of originals first which means the front sides of originals is printed on the back side of a paper 2 1 Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple Press the Basic tab 5 Output then use left right arrows to select Collated or Stapled This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of or
69. is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity 126 Glossary IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A
70. machine automatically prints the fax ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS Before sending a fax you can adjust the document settings such as resolution darkness color duplex and so forth Refer to explanation of this section Z The document setting herein is for only current job If you want to change the default setting on document settings refer to Admin Setting gt General tab gt Default Settings See General settings on page 80 Duplex This function is especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the value Duplex lt 1 Sided J gt e 1 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided Is for the originals that are printed on both sides Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values Resolution i lt Standard gt e Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time e Fine Recommended for the originals containing with small characters thin lines or text that was printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Recommended for originals containing with extrem
71. machine from the website on page 96 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Accounting Method 4 Select Standard Accounting Z If you want to allow users to login only with ID then check Authenticate with Login ID only 5 Click on the Apply button Standard acccounting List 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 3 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Standard Accounting List 4 Select Standard Accounting You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add button Enter a user s ID password and assign job limitation to the user 5 Click on the Apply button Machine status and advanced setup 87 Log OPTION DESCRIPTION Job Log You can enable or disable job log to record job processing results You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Job Log Report Operation Log You can enable or disable operation log to record various operations such as formatting the system creating document box deleting file etc You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Operation Log Report Security Event Youcan enable or disable security event log to
72. material should be sta ble at your machine s fusing temperature Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 123 Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bub bles or other indications of separation e Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components e Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine e Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock or e Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or custom sized 356 mm long materials e Inthe software application set margins at least 6 4 mm away from the edges of the material 36 Loading originals and print media MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Preprinted e Letterhead must be printed with heat resistant ink paper that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check yo
73. messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred 4 Refer to Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages The machine does not print Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not invoke Add new printer wizard to set up your device Check if the printer is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the printer should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For instance this could be an attempt to print document when port is claimed by a scanning application e Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner
74. necessary pull the stacker lever 1b down as well 3 Remove the jammed paper 3 Remove the jammed paper j 4 Close the side cover In the stacker finisher Paper jam in front of finisher Open the stacker front cover 1 2 Press the right part of lever 1c and hold still then push the stacker to the left to release the stacker 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound click g 104 _Troubleshootin 4 Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover Paper jam at exit of finisher 1 Gently pull the paper out through the exit area UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order iY e If the message is not in the table cycle the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service e When you call for service it is very convenient to provide the service representative with the contents of display message e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e yyy indicates the part of the machine zzz indicates the error code When you contact the service center this error code help to hand
75. not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download and unpack the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root tar zxf FilePath UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz root localhost root cd FilePath cdroot Linux root localhost Linux install sh NOTE If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the software you have to use the driver in the text mode Follow the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen 5 When the welcome screen appears click Next Unified Linux Driver Installer Welcome to the Unified Linux Driver installation wizard This program will install all necessary software for printers and MFP devices Click Next to continue with the Setup program Help Next gt Cancel 36 Using Your Printer in Linux 6 When the installation is complete click Finish Unified Linux Driver Installer Unified Linux Driver is installed Please re logon your system for all the installation settings to take effect User Registration Do you want to register yourself as user of the printer MFP model you just installed Being registered you will gain access to various services Yes want to be registered as user Help k Finish The installation program has added the Unified
76. number using the keypad on the control panel 7 Press OK gt Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax With this feature you can forward every fax you received to other destination by faxing When the machine receives a fax a fax is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel e If you want to set the star time and end time select Start Time and End Time e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK gt Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email 4 If Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 En
77. of a paper getting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes e Setting up the hardware e Setting up the network e System requirements SETTING UP THE HARDWARE This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Quick Install Guide Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and complete following steps 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table 100 mm 300 mm i lt ___ gt 3 9 inches 11 8inches KE SSS SQ a a Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing See page 28 for more information Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 5 mm 0 02 inch Otherwise printing quality may be affected poowwceseoeorrrn 2 Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items 25 Getting Started e Installing the software e Machine s basic settings e Understanding the keyboard 3 Remove the tape holding the machine tightly 4 Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit 5 Load paper See Loading paper on p
78. on its surface Try a different brand of paper See Specification on print media on page 34 The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thick Paper Refer to the Software section for details If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS White Spots White spots appears on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine See Cleaning the transfer unit on page 92 Contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface drum part of the imaging unit inside the machine has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU Contact a service representative Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the pr
79. or try adjusting the print quality settings The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different printer cable Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the printer software See Software section The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if
80. originals Duplex on page 42 e Output Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options If you install the optional stacker amp stapler then the staple related option appears See Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple on page 43 e Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job See Selecting the type of originals on page 43 e Light Dark Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images See Changing the darkness on page 43 e Paper Supply Selects the paper supply tray e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use 4 For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 73 Changing the settings for each copy Using special copy features Advanced tab Copies 001 Advanced Image Job Build On ID Copy N Up Off Poster Copy Off Job Build Allows you to copy several pages or different types of Originals into a single copy See Merging multiple jobs as a single copy on page 43 ID Copy Prints 2 sided originals on one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card See ID card copying on page 44 N Up Prints 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of p
81. page 21 Basic Printing 15 Paper Tab Use the following options to set the basic paper handling specifications when you access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties 3 Ox Layout Paper Graphic Extras About a o Copies 1 999 M H WM colate E Paper Options S Size Ad Source Auto Selection x Type Printer Default First Page None x Ad 210 x 297 mm G cj Scaling Printing aly gbi KAG Copies 1 Pining Type None Bj Resolution 600 dpi Favorites Printer Default w P ons Copies Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can select 1 to 999 copies Paper Options Size Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray If the required size is not listed in the Size box click Custom When the Custom Paper Setting window appears set the paper size and click OK The setting appears in the list so that you can select it Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like envelopes and transparencies You have to load one sheet at a time into the Manual Tray or Multi Purpose Tray If the paper source is set to Auto Selection the printer automatically picks up print material in the following tray order Manual Tray or Multi Purpose
82. part of the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine then insert it completely In the optional tray Z This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the optional tray 2 Please refer to the next method for other optional trays since the method is same as the tray 2 1 Open the outer cover in tray 2 100 _Troubleshooting 2 Open the inner cover of tray 2 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Pull out the optional tray 2 5 Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the machine If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 6 6 Remove the paper in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper 2 Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder pull it out gently and slowly T 3 Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper In the optional high capacity feeder 1 Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 4 4 Pull out the optional high capacity feeder Troubleshooting_ 101
83. pressing Stop on the control panel Canceling a print job Basic printing_ 58 faxing optional This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine This chapter includes Preparing to fax Understanding the Fax screen Sending a fax Receiving a fax Adjusting the document settings Setting up a fax phonebook K e You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more information ask the internet service provider e You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission slower fax transmmission poor fax quality and communication failures when faxing over VolP network Contact you local network administrator or Internet Service Provider for more details e To use advanced features of the fax press Machine Setup on the control panel and Admin Setting gt Setup gt Fax Setup See Fax Setup on page 82 e We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter LINE EXT aD k t lt x 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL mode
84. printouts from the stacker Remove printed outs from the output tray Insert credit into the Foreign Device Troubleshooting_ 107 SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists please call for service Touch screen problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The touch screen does not show anything Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Paper feeding problems The paper keeps jamming e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray e An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Specification on print media on page 34 e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove the debris e If an original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper is jammed during printing Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 99 Transparencies stick together in the paper exit Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers
85. private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performa
86. record Log history such as user authentication software upgrading access log exporting or importing data etc You can print the records in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Security Event Log Report Change Admin Password You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication Information Hiding OPTIONAL SERVICE When you want to add the optional features for this machine you have to install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those features Follow the next steps to enable those features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Optional Service pi Ready wy General Setup Print Report Optional Service Manual Image Document Box Cor BES Overwrite Management aa Standard Workflow Management Analog Fax Scan to Email Scan To FTP Automatic Scan To SMB Image Overwrite OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Hiding Level Show All All information in Job Status is Setting Information displayed to all users Show Non Non secured information in Job Secure Status is displayed to all users Information The secured information such as Only secured received fax list or secured print list will be displayed only to the owner kai OPTION DESCRIPTION Copy Enables or disables the
87. select Enable the machine deposits a credit equal to the number of sheets that did not print out correctly then it prints next job for free for the amount deposited With Disable even if you cancel the printing job the machine includes jammed paper in the count and the cost of printing e Image Counter Depends on whether the machine counts blank white pages Machine status and advanced setup_ 85 OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Accounting No Accounting It disables accounting features Method Network You can set the network account Accounting for users by using SyneThru Web Admin Service s job accounting plug in When the users performs their copy fax print or scan service Job with the machine the account module records it You can see the report from the SyncThru Web Admin Service Standard You can set the local account for Accounting maximum 500 users When the users perform their copy fax print or scan service Job with the machine the account module records it You can see the report from Standard Acct Usage Report in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Print Report tab gt Accounting Reports As the device itself can manage user s ID and usage without any remote server this feature is highly suitable for small and medium businesses 77 The accounting system sa regards storing a file to a single server as a single count e Accounting ID List It shows the accoun
88. settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box Untitled c2 Cancel Apply Help 3 Click Save When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved To use a saved setting select the item from the Favorites drop down list The printer is now set to print according to the Favorites setting you selected To delete a Favorites item select it from the list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the list Using Help Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking the Help button in the printer properties window These help screens give detailed information about the printer features provided by the printer driver You can also click from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting Advanced Printing This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks NOTE e Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM This chapter includes e Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing e Printing Posters e Printing Booklets e Printing on Both Sides of Paper e Printing a Reduce
89. share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your printer In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present owner is not functioning properly e Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item e The CUPS Common Unix Printing System version distributed with SUSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher Some color images come out all black This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color sp
90. switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution Glossary_ 127 SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF T
91. the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 66 Faxing Optional Press down arrow on the right side Press Send Batch Press On Press OK e When you send a fax if a fax number is same as the number in delay fax the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to reserved delay fax 4 OY ol FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER DESTINATION You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or an email If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful iY e When you forward a fax by an email you firstly set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service e If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On you cannot use a fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination by faxing 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Fax Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On and enter a fax
92. the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The printer cable is loose or defective Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer and try a print job that you know works Finally try a new printer cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and then back on again Troubleshooting 109 CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The printer does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
93. was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals 128 Glossary Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner NaQeCx A ADF load 32 adjustment altitude 28 admin setting 79 altitude adjustment 81 answering machine fax 62 authentication network accounting 85 printing a report 80 89 setting up 29 80 auto center 47 B Book copy 46 C checking stored document 91 cleaning inside 92 outside 92 scan unit 92 transfer unit 92 Clone copy 45 collated 43 color mode faxing 64 scanning 56 70 control panel 18 19 copy copying 41 46 duplex copy 42 erasing background 47 making a booklet 46 poster 45 reduce enlarge 42 shifting margin 47 112 text photo 43 41 82 46 copy setup 82 DADF cover 18 input tray 18 output tray 18 width
94. with a new one Call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service e Remove the sealing tape from the imaging unit e Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times and reinstall it e Turn the machine off and turn it on again Open side door and close it If the problem still persists please call for service Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Delete the received fax data in the memory to secure memory Call for service Close the finisher until it locks into place Turn the machine off and reinstall the finisher again Check that the finisher cable is connected properly If the problem persists please call for service Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Install the fuser unit Call for service Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 Troubleshooting 105 MESSAGE Imaging unit is not compatible Check user s guide Imaging unit is not installed Install it Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one LSU error zzz Please turn off then on Motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on Original paper does not feed in scanner Original paper is too long for scanner Check size Original paper jam in front of sca
95. with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page see General specifications on page 123 The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Loading originals and print media 35 MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers e Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180 C the machine s fusing temperature e Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine e Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing e To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully e To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight e Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges Labels e To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machines When selecting labels consider the following fac tors Adhesives The adhesive
96. your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout Printer a Presets Standard B E3 Layout Pages per Sheet 1a Layout Direction z 2 s lf a gt Border None Preview Save As PDF Fax Cancel Print Mac OS 10 3 3 Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Layout Direction option To print a border around each page on the sheet select the option you want from the Border drop down list 5 Click Print and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page 48 Duplex Printing You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are Long Edge Binding Which is the conventional layout used in book binding Short Edge Binding Which is the type often used with calendars 1 From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu 2 Select the Layout Printer B Presets Standard ka Layout Pages per Sheet 1 L Border l None Layout Direction la Bis Col N Two Sided Printing Off _ Long Edge Binding O Short Edge Binding Preview Save As PDF Fax Cancel Print Mac OS 10 3
97. 008 12 00 AM Copies 001 j Naat LCD Brightness 9 English 4 Toner Info 73 Using document box e Storing documents to Document box Document Box Screen User Box System Box Box Name a A 11 27 2008 2 11 27 2008 11 27 2008 11 27 2008 11 27 2008 HEOR 11 27 2008 Free Space 637 MB Total 8000 MB Selected 1 25 File 40 MB Total 10 e User Box tab Create the box where you can save documents such as the file you have printed sent by email or scanned When you create a box you can set the password to secure your box The box with a password is called Secured Box and without it it is called public box e System Box tab The machine provided default boxes which you cannot modify them Type Shows the box is secured or not Box Name Shows the box name Owner Shows the user name of a box Date Shows the date of a box created File Shows the number of total files in the box Add Lets you add more boxes Delete Deletes the selected box Edit Lets you modify a box name and an owner name Detail Shows box information Report Prints the information about the documents inside the selected box Search Searches a box with a box name or an owner name e Enter Prints or sends the stored file in the box Box Adding Screen You can create a new box to store your scanned data To add a new Document Box press Add on the Document Box screen M
98. 1 e For details see Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size on page 21 Basic Printing 16 Graphics Tab Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs See Printing a Document on page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below 5 Layout Paper Graphic Extras About r Resolution n 1200 dpi Best S 600 dpi Normal m Toner Save Mode a Printer Setting 2D On oa c Off Ad 210 x 297 mm Ce mm C inch Copies 1 Resolution 600 dpi Favorites Printer Default v Advanced Options Baran cT Resolution The Resolution options you can select may vary depending on your printer model The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Toner Save Mode Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality Some printers do not support this feature Printer Setting If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the printer On Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page Off If you don t need to save toner when printing
99. 2 Click the Layout tab select Poster Printing in the Layout Type drop down list 3 Configure the poster option You can select the page layout from Poster lt 2x2 gt Poster lt 3x3 gt Poster lt 4x4 gt or Custom If you select Poster lt 2x2 gt the output will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages If the option is set to Custom you can enlarge the original from 150 to 400 Depending on the level of the enlargement the page layout is automatically adjusted to Poster lt 2x2 gt Poster lt 3x3 gt Poster lt 4x4 gt Path LOL ap ii D VE A 3x3 Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to pasting the sheets together 0 15 inches A kale Q ine 4 D5 TD 0 15 inches 4 Click the Paper tab select the paper source size and type KO 5 Click OK and print the document You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together 20 Advanced Printing Printing Booklets This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 From the Layout tab ch
100. 3 Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option 4 Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a document the printer may not print the document in the way you want In case of Collated copy if your document has odd pages the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy will be printed on the front and back of one sheet In case of Uncollated copy the Same page will be printed on the front and back of one Sheet Therefore if you need multiple copies of a document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper you must print them one at a time as Separate print jobs Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scanning You can scan docoments using Image Capture Macintosh OS offers Image Capture you do not need to install other TWAIN compliant softwares l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR place a single document face down on the document glass 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture NOTE f No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem persists please refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Set the scan options on this program 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE For more informa
101. 77 www samsung com 0302 200077 GREECE 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 www samsung com 726 7864 only from land line 30 210 6897691 from mobile and land line GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish 132 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site HONDURAS 800 27919267 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish HONG KONG 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk Chinese www samsung com hk _en English HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 INDIA 1800 1100 11 www samsung com 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com 021 5699 7777 IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com ITALY 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com JORDAN 800 22273 www samsung com 065777444 KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com GSM 7799 KENYA 0800 724 000 www samsung com KOSOVO 381 0113216899 www samsung com KUWAIT 183 2255 www samsung com ae English www samsung com ae _ar Arabic KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung com LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com MACEDONIA 023 207 777 www samsung com MEXICO 01 800 SA
102. 9 Fedora Core 1 4 Mandrake 9 2 10 1 SuSE 8 2 9 2 CPU Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher RAM 256 MB or higher free HDD space 1 GB or higher Connection USB interface or Network interface Software Linux Kernel 2 4 or higher Glibc 2 2 or higher CUPS SANE K e Itis necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images e The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE You have to install the machine software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs iY e The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as a network machine If you want to connect a machine with a USB cable refer to Software section e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system The procedure and popup window which appears during the installation may differ depending on the operating system the printer feature or the interface in use See Software section 1 Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed See Setting up the network on page 25 All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation 2 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with th
103. Acct Prints the remained amount of Remain Report Standard Accounting Machine status and advanced setup_ 89 OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Report Configuration Report You can print a report on the machine s overall configuration Fax Report You can set to print the information of a fax reports e Multi Send Report When you fax to several destination set this option to print a transmission report On is to print every time you send a fax the machine prints a confirmation report With On Error only when the transmission error occurred the report will be printed out e Fax Send Report Appearance You can select whether the image on the confirmation report shows or not e Fax Sent Received Report The machine stores the logs on each transmission and prints out every 50 logs with this option On It you select Off the machine stores the logs but does not print e Fax Send Report The machine prints the confirmation report after each fax job only when you send a fax to one destination E mail Confirmation Report Report Continue The report shows the job of scanning and sending it via Scan to Email e On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed e Off No report is printed after completing a job e On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Scan to Server Confirmation The report shows the job of
104. Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 7 It will take longer to K print when you print a PDF file as an image Your machine has an odd smell during initial use The oil used to protect the fuser is evaporating After printing about 100 color pages there will be no more smell It is a temporary issue The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete If you are under the DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Suggested solutions Change the language setting See Changing the display language on page 29 Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing 110 Troubleshooting Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly you may notice a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on
105. Click Next Select Installation Type PSnmsunog Select type that you want and click Next button Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer g Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network o Custom installatiori fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 Select your printer and click Next Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer ex Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name Update Set IP Address lt Back Next Cancel NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Tum on the power of the device 3 IF New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the install
106. Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment 8 Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document OPENSSL LICENSE 10
107. D SOLUTIONS Copies are too light or too dark Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or lighten the backgrounds of copies 112 Troubleshooting Smears lines marks or spots appears on copies e If the defects are on the original press Light and Dark arrows to lighten the background of your copies e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 92 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Copy image is e Ensure that the original is face down on the skewed scanner glass or face up in the DADF e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time The unit scans very slowly e Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed e Graphics are scanned more slowly than text e Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS re
108. ECTRICAL amp ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems Xx This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its i working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause
109. ENT RECOMMENDED Os FREE HDD CPU RAM SPACE Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz 64 MB 600 MB Pentium Il 933 MHz 128 MB Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz 128 MB 1 5 GB Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Pentium Il 933 MHz 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2 GB Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB 1024 MB Windows Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 1 GB 16 GB bitor 64 bit processor 2 GB or higher e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Pentium IV 1 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 GHz x86 or 2048 MB R2 1 4GHz x64 processors 2GHz or faster L e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have an administrator right can install the software e Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine Macintosh REQUIREMENT RECOMMENDED OPERATIN G SYSTEM FREE HDD CUP RAM SPACE Mac OS X e PowerPC G4 e 128 MB fora 1 GB 10 4 or lower G5 PowerPC based e Intel MAC 512 MB processors e 512 MB for an Intel based MAC 1 GB Mac OS X e 867 MHZ or 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 10 5 faster PowerPC G4 G5 e Intel processors Mac OS X e Intel 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB 10 6 processors Linux ITEM REQUIREMENTS Operating system Red Hat 8
110. FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING THE FAX OPTION KIT After installing the Fax kit you have to set up the machine in order to use this function 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press Country Change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country 122 Installing accessories specifications This chapter guides you about this machine s specifications such as various features This chapter includes e General specifications e Printer specifications e Copier specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Item Description DADF Up to 100 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond DADF document Width 148 5 to 218 mm size e Length 145 to 356 mm Paper input e Tray 1 520 multi page for plain paper 75 g m capacity e Multi purpose tray 100 multi page for plain paper 75 g m e optional tray 2 3 4 520 multi page for plain paper 75 g m e optional high capacity feeder 2 100 multi page for plain paper 75 g m For details about paper input capacity see Specification on print media on page 34 Paper output e Face down 500 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond capacity e Optional stacker 500 sheets 75 g m 20 Ib bond e Scanner specifications e Facsimile
111. IA TYPE GUIDELINES Single side printing All sizes supported by the machine tray 1 optional tray multi purpose tray high capacity feeder Duplex printing Letter A4 Legal Folio Oficio JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive Ad Statement tray 1 optional tray multi purpose tray high capacity feeder Fax mode Letter A4 Legal tray 1 optional tray high capacity feeder a 75 to 90 g m 20 24 Ib only b Only the optional fax kit is installed Envelopes Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m or jamming may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope O 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes
112. LE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default printer Select Samsung SCX 6x55 Series PCL 6 or Samsung SCX 6x55 Series PS as your default printer in your Windows The machine does not print Continued The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is not enough to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again Check the machine for the following e The side cover is not closed Close the side Cover e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 99 e No paper is loaded Load paper See Loading paper on page 37 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or the imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the printer properties may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the printer properties Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page
113. M which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 3 Double click the Samsung MFP on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the MAC_ Printer folder Double click the Samsung MFP Installer OSX icon Select Uninstall and then click Uninstall Click Continue O 60 NOU A When the uninstallation is done click Quit Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Scan driver Installing the Scan driver l Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer Turn on your computer and printer 2 Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive 3 Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the Samsung MFP on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the Twain folder Double click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon Enter the password and click OK O On O UI Click Continue 10 Click Install 11 Click Continue 12 After the installation is finished click Restart Uninstalling the Scan driver l Insert the CD ROM which came with your printer into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop 3 Double click the Samsung MFP on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC Installer folder Double click the Twain folder Double click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon
114. MSUNG www samsung com 726 7864 MOLDOVA 0 800 614 40 www samsung com MONGOLIA 7 800 555 55 55 www samsung com MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www samsung com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www samsung com NAMIBIA 8197267864 www samsung com NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com 0900 7267864 0 10 min Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 133 2008 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company e Microsoft Windows Windows Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc e UFST and MicrolType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc e TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations e Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 8 02 Samsung Printer Software section Software section Contents 1 Installing Printer Software in
115. Press Add Segment 7 Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper 8 Press Start to start the scanning job 9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 Z As long as space remains on your device s hard drive you can add segments without any restriction 10 After adding segments press Send All CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values Duplex lt 1 Sided j gt e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees 4 To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution Yo
116. Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select the appropriate item for your occasion e Machine Status Shows the current machine status e Admin Setting Allows administrator to set up the machine When you press Admin Setting login message pops up Enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 e Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray e Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Machine Status screen Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status pi Machine Status Supplies Life Machine Info Network Setup Security Optional Service Document Box Management Printing a report e Machine Info tab Displays the detailed information about the machine and some options allows for validating your machine See Browsing the machine s status on page 80 e Back Returns to the previous screen Admin Setting screen Gives you access to detailed machine settings When you press Admin Setting a login message appears If the administrator set the password you have to enter the password every time you want to use Admin Setting See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Admin Setting w General Print Report Device Info Service Center Registration Default Settings mm Contact Info Timers san
117. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine Paper sticks together e Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray See Specification on print media on page 34 e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Specification on print media on page 34 e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight e If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 99 Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Specification on print media on page 34 e Ifan original does not feed into the machine the DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative 108 Troubleshooting Printing problems CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION POSSIB
118. SAFETY During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is E advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area If you need additional information about ozone request your nearest Samsung dealer MERCURY SAFETY Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only STATE OF CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING US ONLY The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California to publish a list of chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such chemicals WARNING This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or other reproductive harm This appliance can cause low level exposure to the chemicals which can be minimized by operating the appliance in a well ventilated area PERCHLORATE WARNING This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR Manganese Dioxide Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate U S A only RECYCLING LEY Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT WASTE EL
119. SCX 6555N Series imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product features of your new laser MFP Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product Your machine provides printing copying scanning and faxing functions With the machine you can SPECIAL FEATURES Some features are optional Please check the specifications sections See Specifications on page 123 Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective output See Software section e Your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 53 ppm and letter sized paper at up to 55 ppm e For duplex printing your machine prints A4 sized paper at up to 50 ipm and letter sized paper at up to 52 ipm lt p Handle many different types of printable material e The multi purpose tray supports letterhead envelopes a labels transparencies custom sized media postcards and heavy paper The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper e The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support plain paper in various sizes e The 2 100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in various sizes Create professional documents e Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Software section e Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
120. SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 103 Paper has jammed in the registration area The CCD Charged Couple Device lock has been locked The CCD does not detect its home location or move The toner supply is low Stapler is run out The staple cartridge is not installed There is a problem in the system operation The IP address is used in other place elsewhere The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine Clear the jam See In the paper exit area on page 103 Unlock the CCD lock See Front view on page 18 Or turn off the machine and on again Try again If the problem persists call for service Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge Order Staple Cartridge See Staple Cartridge on page 118 And replace it See Replacing the Stapler on page 121 Install the staple cartridge following the steps explained on the back of the finisher door See Replacing the Stapler on page 121 If you want to continue the print job and disregard of this error message go to Admin Setting to adjust the option See General settings on page 80 Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address
121. Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Book copying Use this feature to copy a book If the book is too thick lift the scanner lid until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the scanner lid open This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 1 Place the originals face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Z To remove shadows of a book edge press the Image tab gt Erase Edge gt Book Center and Edges Erase 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Book Copy 4 Select the binding option e Off Disables this feature e Left Page Prints left page of the book e Right Page Prints right page of the book e Both Page Prints both facing pages of the book 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Booklet copying The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper 46 Copying moh Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass
122. UT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence 11 contents 12 INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA 18 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 2 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 32 32 32 33 34 35 35 36 37 37 Features of your new laser MFP Safety Information Printer overview Front view Rear view Control panel overview Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons Touch screen Machine Setup button Job Status button Power Saver button Interrupt button Understanding the Status LED Menu overview Main screen Machine Setup button Job Status button Supplied software Printer driver feat
123. Windows Installing Printer SOMWALS cciercdnsyciccendcancdninedecenietendyderdpiecdeienieinsei Ke ANENA SAATANA TETERE NARKA 5 Installing Software for Local PHAUAG svissiinarstncaisedentensiensaneoanereruaeerwmerwererinwenteewieern a 5 Installing Software for Network Printing 20000 22200 8 R amp installing Printer SOTWaARC HANGAAN AA 11 REMOVING Printer Software 222002212 2 cece eee een ee een DEE A EEE DRESSES EE DE ESSE ESSE EEE EES E SESE EDGES SEES GEESE EEE 12 2 Basic Printing PENG a DOCUMENL mGA ANA E APANG NANANA AA NANANA 13 BINAN PRN AKA AKA AGA ANA AA NA TE 14 PIER SELO Da DAAN NGA DAN GAGANA pied NPA LING NANANA TINAKPAN AA AA DAA 14 LONOUE TAO ee eee E AG ANNA AG AA AGA NAA AA 15 PADS TON AA AA NANA NATA AA ANA NA serene as 15 GlapiiGs Lab an8 GTA AGA TANG ANA AP IGINAGALANG NAA ANA GANANG 16 HA AG AA AA AA AA teats 17 POGUE Tab aa AA NANG ANAN E E AAAAAANAA 18 aalala AA AA AN AA AR AA A T 18 USING a PAYO NEE SELO 2a EE A A teeter E E gets 18 USING RGI e a ae er PAGA NAAAGNAS NA NAAN AKA AGA 18 3 Advanced Printing Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing 0 242 a 19 PDOP OSU TO AA AA AA AA AA 20 PANINO BOORI ES AAP MAPA PAAPPAAP PAR AP PA NPA EE E PAN APAPAP PANA PAKANA PA AA PANA API 20 Printing on Both Sides of Paper u 22000022200 00 eee e eee eee eee eee e eee Eee ed DEES EEE a SESE E EEE S ESSE EES GEESE EES a GEESE REGS 21 Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document
124. a larger one Page 122 Stand You can place the e Tall Stand SCX machine on the DSK10T ergonomically l e Short Stand SCX designed cabinet which DSK10S lets you reach the machine conveniently 77 If you do not use Also you can easily K the optional tray move the cabinet with then Tall Stand is its wheels if necessary recommended In and store case you add miscellaneous items three optional like papers into the trays use Short cabinet Stand Stacker 4 Stapler 500 sheets SCX FIN10S Finisher Staple Cartridge 3 x 5 000 staples per SCX STP000 package covers maximum thickness of 50 sheets 1 staple position Ordering supplies and accessories 118 ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER FDI Foreign Device Interface kit This card is installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine SCX KIT10F 4 Bin Mailbox You can load up to 100 sheets of paper in each stacker To use 4 Bin Mailbox you need to purchase and install 2 Bin Finisher first SCX MBT40S 2 Bin Finisher Stacker amp Stapler The 2 Bin Finisher consists of big size output tray which holds up to 500 sheets of paper and small size output tray which holds up to 100 sheets of paper SCX FIN20S a Countries which supports the serial telephone system are German
125. a Samsung Network Scan Manager NetScan on page 53 e Scan to Server Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with SMB and FTP See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 Basic tab This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server and NetScan s basic screen Scan to Email Advanced Image From abc def com A Address AA To Local Global Cc lt gt Bee Resolution Subject lt 300 dpi gt Message File Name v e From Sender s email address e To Cc Bcc Recipients addresses Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be displayed e Subject Message Subject and message of the email e Remove All Erases everything in the input area e Address Inputs the recipient s address just by pressing stored addresses You can store frequently used email addresses from your computer using the SyncThru Web Service See Storing email addresses on page 52 e Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use Z For details about how to use the Document Box re
126. a completion report in your workform enable this option OPTION DESCRIPTION Complete To add a completion notification in your workform Notification enable this option Default Fax To create and execute a workform including the fax feature enable this option PRINTING A REPORT You can print a report on the machine s configuration or font list etcetera 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK 3 Press the Print Report tab 2 Admin Setting General Print Report Print Accounting Reports Report Network Configuration PS3 Font List PCL Font List Schedule Jobs Report MA Pa OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Print You can print Network Configuration PS3 Font List PCL Font List and Schedule Jobs Report Schedule Jobs Report shows the job list in pending or in delayed faxing list as well Accounting Supplies You can print the amount of each Reports Information category that your machine has printed so far Network Auth It displays user login IDs and Log Report emails Usage Page You can print the report on the Report amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Accounting Prints the report of printing out Report count for each login user Standard Acct Prints the used amount of Usage Report Standard Accounting Standard
127. a host name 8 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 389 9 Enter Search Root Directory the top search level of the LDAP directory tree 10 Select Authentication method There are two options for LDAP server login Anonymous This is used to bind with null password and login ID Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS Simple This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS 11 Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN 12 Select Match User s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute options are CN UID or UserPrincipalName 13 Enter your login name password maximum number of search results and search timeout iY LDAP Referral LDAP client will search the referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP server has a referral server 14 Select Search Name Order 15 Check the box next to From Field Security Options Z This option is only provided if you have selected the Network authentication option in the user authentication setting You may check this option if you want to search for information in a default email address group 16 Click on Apply User Accounting Method Enabling Acccounting Method 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your
128. a specific time period You can set a time period for at least an hour Language It allows you to change the language that appears on the touch screen Power Saver You can reduce energy consumption by setting these features Power Saver has three options first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp under the glass And Power Save turns off all the fans within the machine after a certain time Low Power Save turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit See Using energy saving feature on page 29 Sound You can adjust the loudness of the machine sound Press Fault to adjust the machine s error sound Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong option Press Selection to sound whenever you press the selection from your touch screen Supplies Management The machine gives you the notification of the imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder and resets the used fuser counter bias transfer roller feed roller and document feeder friction pad counter Tray Management This feature allows you to select the tray and paper you use for a printing job Paper size paper type and paper color options are adjusted here Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the window asking whether you set the paper size and type for the just opened tray e Auto Tray Switch If tray1 and tray2 are filled with letter size paper when tray1 is empty and this option is On then the machine continues p
129. ace for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com Troubleshooting 115 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Some color images come out in unexpected color This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem cannot scan via Gimp Front end e Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find Xsane plug
130. achine from the list and enter a name user ID and PIN Personal Identification Number for the machine kaa iY e The model name of your machine is automatically entered as the scanner name but it can be changed upon your need e The ID can be entered up to 8 characters The first character must be a letter e The PIN must be of 4 digits Scanning_ 53 7 Click Next 8 Click Finish Your machine is added to the scanner list of the Network Scan program and you can now scan images through the network 4 You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the scan settings from the Samsung Network Scan Manager window Click Properties and set the options in each tab Z The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access You can enable the secured scan feature from the SyncThru Web Service Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 And click Setting gt Machine Settings gt Scan gt Scan Security gt PC Scan Security Scanning and sending via NetScan 1 Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a network and Samsung Network Scan Manager is running on the computer 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass 3 Press Scan from the Main screen If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This me
131. ading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Image tab gt Margin Shift 4 Select Margin Shift option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Center Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically The original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature This option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass e Custom Margin Adjusts the margin of the left and right top and bottom as you want using arrows This option supports both on the scanner glass or in DADF 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying p Watermark copying You can copy the original with a watermark For example you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the copy 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals and print media on page 32 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt WaterMark Select WaterMark option e Off Disables this feature e Top Secret Prints the original with Top Secret text e Confidential Prints the original with Confidential text e Urgent Prints the original with Urgent text e Draft Prints the original with Draft text e Custom The machine prints the original with the customized tex
132. age 103 Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper Jam inside of In the duplex unit See In the duplex unit area on page 103 duplex path Paper jam in front of In the stacker unit See Paper jam in front finisher of finisher on page 104 Paper jam inside In the stacker unit finisher Paper jam inside finisher s See Paper jam inside finisher Paper jam inside finisher s duplex duplex on page 104 Paper jam at exit of In the stacker unit See Paper jam at exit finisher of finisher on page 105 N To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In the tray 1 1 Pull out the paper tray to open After you pull it out completely lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine Once you remove the jammed paper here open the side cover and then close it to clear the error message on the display If there is any resistance and the paper does not move immediately when you pull stop pulling Then 3 Open the side cover Z Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface Scratches or smudges will result in poor print quality Troubleshooting_ 99 4 Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown M W j AAN 5 Close the side cover and insert the paper tray Lower the rear
133. age 37 6 Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine 7 Turn the machine on uN When you move the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing quality e Ifyou are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long time turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode Then close the scan lid and turn the power off And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock e This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails SETTING UP THE NETWORK You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network printer You can set up the basic network settings with the machine s touch screen N If you want to use the USB cable connect the cable between a computer and you machine Then refer to Software section Supported operating systems The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine ITEM REQUIREMENTS Network interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Network operating system Novell NetWare 5 x 6 x e Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 7 Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS 10 3 10 6 Network protocols e TCP IP e EtherTalk Dynamic addressing server DHCP BOOTP If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to set up a DHCP network protocol go to http developer appl
134. agged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that
135. aining documents from the DADF 2 Open the DADF cover 3 Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the DADF SRS 4 Close the DADF cover and the document input tray Then place the documents back in the DADF 98 Troubleshooting Roller misfeed 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Grasp the misfeed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 1 scanner lid If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to step 3 3 Open the white document background 5 Close the white document background and the scanner lid Then load the removed pages back into the DADF CLEARING PAPER JAMS When a paper jam occurs the warming message appears on the display screen Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO Paper Jam in tray 1 Inthe paper feed area See In the multi Paper Jam in tray 2 tray 1 optional tray or purpose tray on Paper Jam in tray 2 Multi purpose tray page 102 HCF See In the optional Paper Jam in tray 3 tray on page 100 HCF high capacity Paper Jam in tray 4 feeder on page 101 Paper Jam in MP tray Paper Jam in exit In the fuser area or See In the fuser area area around the toner or around the toner cartridge cartridge on page 103 Paper Jaminside of In the paper exit area See In the paper exit machine area on p
136. and software information specification Print Report You can print various helpful and informative reports such as System Report Fax Report and Scan Report See Printing a machine report on page 91 Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your machine and their current configurations Select the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper type and size You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far To print this report See Printing a report on page 89 Usage Counters 80 Machine status and advanced setup GENERAL SETTINGS Before you get ready to using the machine it is recommended to set up the machine parameters 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK Factory setting is 1111 3 Press the General tab 2 Admin Setting nel General Print Report Device Info gt 7 Service Center Registration Date amp Time ee Measurements Timers Vv OPTION DESCRIPTION Device Info The sub options available are Service Center Registration and Contact Info You may enter information on service center and purchasing point Date amp Time You can set the date and time See Setting the date and time on page 29 Default Window Set the first window that will appear on the display screen afte
137. aper See Copying ID with the manual ID copy option on page 44 Poster Copy Prints a large image into divided 9 pages See Poster copying on page 45 Clone Copy Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page See Clone copying on page 45 Book Copy Allows you to copy an entire book See Book copying on page 46 Booklet Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1 sided or 2 sided originals See Booklet copying on page 46 Covers Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray See Cover copying on page 46 Transparencies Adds a blank or printed divider between transparencies within a set See Transparency copying on page 46 WaterMark Prints an image with the added watermark See Watermark copying on page 47 Overlay Prints an image with the image previously stored in your machine See Overlay copying on page 48 Auto Crop Prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin See Auto crop copying on page 48 Copying 40 Image tab LP Ready To Copy Copies 001 Basic Advanced ES tt Erase Edge Off Erase Background Off Margin Shift Off e Erase Edge Allows you to erase punch holes staple marks and fold creases along any of the four documents edges See Erasing edges on page 47 e Erase Background Prints an image with no background See Erasing background ima
138. appears on the display USB guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the machine Follow the instruction on the LCD This icon appears only when you connect an USB memory module Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed out depending on the optional kit or program installed in your machine To switch the display screen and see other available icons press the right arrow on the display screen Machine Setup button When you press this button you can browse current machine settings or change machine values See Machine Setup on page 79 20 Introduction This button allows you to move to Copy Fax Scan Document Box menu directly Machine Status Shows the current status of the machine Admin Setting Allows an administrator to set up the machine Tray Management Shows the currently installed tray and their status You can also change the paper settings for each tray Usage Page Report You can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper size and type Job Status button When you press this button the screen shows the lists of currently running jobs queued jobs and completed jobs it Active Notice No Job Name Status User Job Type a 000 Copy JobJobName 0 Scanning JobOwner 0 Copy Hr 001 Copy JobJobName 1 Scanning JobOwner 1 Copy 002 Copy JobJobName 2 Scanning JobOwner 2 Copy 003 Copy JobJobName 3 Scanning
139. at there is paper in the tray e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the DADF or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it See Cleaning the scan unit on page 92 The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to solve out the problem 114 Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Faxes do not storein There may not be enough memory space to memory store the fax If the display shows the low Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job message delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try t
140. ation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation 7 e The installation window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer and interface in use 6 Select the components to be installed and click Next Select components that you would like to install en Select components Select components that you would like to install Chanae Destination Folder Browse lt Back Cancel NOTE You can change the desired installation folder by clicking Browse 7 After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you choose to print a test page select the checkbox and click Next Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 9 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung select the checkbox and click Finish You are now sent to the Samsung web site Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership R escccccesceessooceocooecocoseosocoessosstooocsoceossoe Installing Printer Software in Windows Installing Software for Network Prin
141. ation report 90 e mail confirmation report 90 fax report 90 network auth log report 89 PCL font list 89 scan report 91 90 Schedule jobs report 89 supplies information 89 usage page report 89 printing problem solving 109 USB memory 72 problem solve Linux 115 printing quality 110 problems copying 112 display message 105 faxing 114 network scanning 113 paper feeder 108 PostScript 114 printing 109 scanning 113 touch screen 108 Windows 115 Q quality scanning 56 71 R remote code 82 replacing components imaging unit 94 toner cartridge 93 replacing stapler 121 Report 89 Resolution faxing 63 scanning 55 S scan preset 57 Scan to Email 51 confirmation 90 Scan to Server 54 confirmation 90 scanned file format 57 71 scanner glass loading documents 32 scanner lid 18 Scanner lock switch 18 scanning color mode 56 70 darkness 56 71 enabling the scan kit option 88 56 71 file format 57 71 original size 55 70 56 70 printing an email report 91 quality 56 71 resolution 55 70 scan preset 57 51 54 53 54 113 USB flash memory 69 74 75 serial number 91 service center registration 80 service contact numbers 132 shifting margin 47 side cover 18 SMB 54 sound 81 speed dial no 64 Stacker 118 stand 18 118 staple cartridge ordering 118 replacing 121 stored documents 91 supplies browsing the supplies life 80 checking the supplies life 91 expected imaging unit life
142. ause paper curl See Specification on print media on page 34 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 34 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black If you are using transparencies try another type of transparency Because of the composition of transparencies some character voids are normal You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications See Specification on print media on page 34 Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The imaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The imaging unit may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Solid Color or Black pages e The imaging un
143. aver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab 3 Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build 4 Press On to enable the job build function pi Ready to scan your Job Build segment Advanced Job Build 0 Pages A L Jo Original Size Aia Delay Send cused o Priority Send NM Display Between Polling Segments wv e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with his screen Then user can select to keep sending fax or stop e Delete Deletes a segment e Delete All Deletes all segments e Send All Prints all segments e Add Segment Adds a new segment e Cancel Remove all segments in the list and cancel the job Press Add Segment Place the originals face up in the DADF Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job Repeat step 5 to step 7 Go TAO Z As long as space remains on your device s hard drive you can add segments without any restriction 9 After adding segments press Send All 62 _Faxing Optional RECEIVING A FAX This section explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory Whe
144. by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window opens Printer Properties General Connection Driver Jobs Classes Name vp F Mm rpu Location Description _ Hee Co cancel Hee amet The following five tabs display at the top of the window e General allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration e Connection allows you to view or select another port If you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the printer port in this tab e Driver allows you to view or select another printer driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options eJobs shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list e Classes shows the class that your printer is in Click Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Prope
145. can output Use left right arrow to adjust the values See Darkness on page 56 Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns See Erase Background on page 56 Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge See Scan to Edge on page 56 Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab 2 Ready to Email E DY Basic Advanced Image Quality Draft DS File Format PDF ha Scan Preset Custom Eee Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output See Quality on page 56 File Format Selects the file format of the scan output See File Format on page 57 Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose See Scan Preset on page 57 Back Returns to the previous screen SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING THROUGH EMAIL SCAN TO EMAIL You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass for one sheet of paper Press Scan from the Main screen Z If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Managing your machine from the webs
146. can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine device using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 Type lpr lt file_ name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only Ipr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first J ust select any files you want to print and click Open Change the printer and print job properties Properties In the LPR GUI window select your printer from the list and change the printer and print job properties For details about the properties window see page 40 General Text Graphics Device m Paper Options Paper Size AA Paper Orientation Portrait C Landscape Ji Reverse mp Paper Type Printer Default bd m Banners Start None End None Pages per Side N Up Normal 1 Up Ozu _ 4 Up Help OK at Cancel The following four tabs display at the top of the window e General allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents enables the duplex feature adds start and end banners and changes 3 Click OK to start printing t
147. clean and dry white sheet DADF glass WIN scanner lid 4 scanner glass 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge e Inside the protective bag from the original package e Correct side up in a horizontal position not standing on end e Do not store consumables in Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 and not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty place
148. copying Booklet copying Cover copying Transparency copying Erasing edges Erasing background images Shifting margins Watermark copying Overlay copying Auto crop copying Multi Bin Scanning basics Understanding the Scan screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Output tab Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email Setting up an email account Storing email addresses Entering email addresses by the address book Entering email addresses by the keyboard Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager NetScan Preparation for network scanning Scanning and sending via NetScan Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once Changing the scan feature settings 13 contents 14 BASIC PRINTING FAXING OPTIONAL 58 58 59 59 59 60 60 60 60 60 Duplex Resolution Original Size Original Type Color Mode Darkness Erase Background Scan to Edge Quality File Format PDF Encryption Scan Preset Printing a document Canceling a print job Preparing to fax Understanding the Fax screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Sending a fax Setting the fax header Sending a fax Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial
149. current settings to the default values Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver mode See Using energy saving feature on page 29 Stops an operation at any time The pop up Stop window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Start Starts a job Na GOOGOOG 0 O00 All illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models When you use the touch screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else 19 Introduction Power Saver INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND USEFUL BUTTONS Touch screen The touch screen allows for user friendly operation of the machine Once you press the home icon B on the screen it shows the Main screen 2 01 01 2008 12 00 AM Copies 001 A aa LCD Brightness Shows Help You can find the explanation by feature contents Copy Enters the Copy menu Fax Enters the Fax menu Optional Scan Enters Scan to Email NetScan Scan to Server menu Document Box Enters the Document Box menu See Checking Document Box on page 91 USB When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen Logout Logs out from the currently logged in account Toner Info Shows amount of toner used LCD Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen KJ To change the language that
150. d If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance N 14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation 15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning If possible unplug the ZA AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm 16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V machine then it should be 16 AWG or bigger 17 Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord 18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 19 This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased Due to different voltage frequency telecommunication configuration and etc a AWG American Wire Gauge LASER SAFETY STATEMENT The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or p
151. d Dial No Search Searches the fax number which currently stored in Individual phonebook When the keyboard pops up enter ID e Detail Shows ID Fax No and Included group information if it is grouped See Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No on page 64 64 Faxing Optional e Apply Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list in the Basic tab e Cancel Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen 2 Press New 3 Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up keyboard and the fax number in the Fax No area using the number keypad on the control panel New ID Speed Dial No lt 000 gt Fax No e ID Enters the name e Speed Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows e Fax No Enters a fax numbers only the numbers with the area code if necessary 4 Press OK Storing Group fax numbers Group No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Group 2 Press New 3 Press the input area in Group Dial ID then the keyboard pops up enter the name 4 Select Group Dial No with left right arrows kA PA NANANA Group Dial ID Group Dial No ada 000 pat e Group Dial ID Enters the group name e Group Dial No Is automatically filled with the first free number If you want to assign to a different number use left right arrows 5 Press OK 6 Select
152. d for email pops up After you enter the address press OK to activate entered address Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From To Cc Bcc Subject Message in order pooma CO 1 7 LI D E UG CUA Sss BE ams p e Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Getting Started_ 31 loading originals and print medie This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Loading originals e Selecting print media LOADING ORIGINALS You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DADF If an original is detected in the DADF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass e Loading paper e Setting the paper size and type 3 Close the scanner lid iY e Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption
153. d for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use NOTES e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK 24 Advanced You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button a PS Advanced Document Settings E 23 Paper Output E in Graphic E ia Document Options e Paper Output this option allows you to select the size of the paper loaded in the tray e Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Document Options this options allow you to set
154. d or Enlarged Document e Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size e Using Watermarks e Using Overlays Advanced Printing Po at D D Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Layout tab choose Multiple Pages per Side in the Layout Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 5 Click the Paper tab select the paper source size and type 6 Click OK and print the document O IH wD Printing Posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13
155. d select a save location 5 Click Save Sending a Fax 1 Placea single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click Send Fax from the home screen 3 Click add file and locate the file to fax 4 Click Send Fax 5 Enter the fax information recipient s number cover page information etc 6 Click Send Plug ins Easy Document Creator will also create new plug ins for Microsoft PowerPoint Word and Excel These new plug ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator menu on the applications menu bars Scan to Office Send Fax and E Book Scanning 31 Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop The first time you scan with your machine select it as your TWAIN source in the application you use The basic scanning process involves a number of steps l Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Load the document s face up into the DADF or ADF OR Place a single document face down on the document glass 3 Open an application such as Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image NOTE You need to follow the program s instructions for acquiring an image Please refer to the user s guide of the application Scanning
156. documents in various sizes and types of print materials SCX S6555A TYPE AVERAGE YIELD PART NUMBER Toner cartridge Approx 25 000 SCX D6555A Imaging unit Approx 80 000 SCX R6555A High capacity feeder If you are frequently experiencing paper supply problems you can attach an additional 2 100 sheet tray SCX HCF 100 a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 b Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4 or letter sized paper Z Depending on the options and job mode the imaging unit s lifespan may differ uN When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country where the machine was purchased Otherwise print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies vary depending on the specific country ACCESSORIES Fax option kit This kit lets you use your machine as a fax machine SCX FAX210 7 After installing Z the kit you have to set up your machine to activate this machine See You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER Memory module ML MEM160 256 MB Extends your machine s memory capacity 14 This machine comes with 256 MB DIMM To expand the memory of your machine you must remove the existing DIMM and purchase
157. dow may differ depending on the printer in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar NOTES The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the Presets drop down list to access the following features Printer l B Presets Standard B Layout BR Pages per Sheet 1 i8 Layout Direction Pal Ka Border None O Two Sided off Long edged binding Short edged binding 7 PDFv Preview Mac OS 10 4 ePages per Sheet This feature determines how many pages printed on one page For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper on the next column eLayout Direction You can select the printing direction on a page as like the examples on Ul Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution Quality and Color Mode Select Graphics form the Presets drop down list to access the graphic features Printer ua Presets Standard o Graphics B Quality a O Best S Normal PDFv Preview Cancel Print Mac OS 10 4 eResolution Quality You can select the printing resolution The higher the setting the sharper the clarit
158. dpi Rx only Memory 16 MB Halftone 256 levels Auto dialer up to 200 numbers WIA standard Up to 600 x 600 dpi Scan to USB NetScan 100 200 300 dpi Scan to E mail Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 600 dpi Network Scan File PDF TIFF JPEG format Effective e Scanner glass 348 mm 13 7 inches scanning length e DADF 348 mm 13 7 inches Effective scanning width Max 208 mm 8 2 inches 124 Specifications a Standard resolution MMR JBIG Maximum modem speed Phase C by ITU T No 1 chart Memory Tx ECM b Rx stands for receiving a fax glossary 14 The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes
159. e Sets the originals to a specific fixed size See Original Size on page 70 e Back Returns to the previous screen Image tab 2 Ready O Basic Advanced Onginal Type Text Color Mode Mono Darkness U i J Erase Background Off Scan to Edge Off e Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo See Original Type on page 70 e Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode See Color Mode on page 70 e Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output Use left right arrow to adjust the values See Darkness on page 71 e Erase Background Erases backgrounds like paper patterns See Erase Background on page 71 e Scan to Edge Scans originals from edge to edge See Scan to Edge on page 71 e Back Returns to the previous screen Output tab Advanced Quality Draft Scan Preset Sharing and Printing File Format PDF File Policy Rename e Quality Adjusts the display quality of the scan output See Quality on page 71 Using USB memory device 69 e Scan Preset Automatically changes some scan options such as file format resolution and more You can adjust options to fit each specific purpose See Scan Preset on page 71 e File Format Selects the file format of the scan output See File Format on page 71 e File Policy Se
160. e C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Transparency Letter A4 Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g m 37 to 39 Ib 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper for the tray e 20 sheets of 75 g m2 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray Labels Letter Legal Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 bond paper for the tray Ca by mo e 10 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib in SPA NEO the multi purpose tray Card stock Letter Legal Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 220 g m 24 to 58 Ib e 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Executive A5 Statement Oficio Ab Post Card 4x6 bond paper for the tray 10 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib in the multi purpose tray Minimum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 86 x 5 83 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond a lf media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond use the multi purpose tray b Maximum capacity may differ dependin c High capacity feeder is not supported A do media weight thickness and environmental conditions Loading originals and print media 34 Media sizes supported in each mode MODE SIZE SOURCE Guidelines for special print media Copy mode Letter A4 Legal Oficio Folio Executive JIS B5 A5 A6 tray 1 optional tray 2 multi purpose tray high capacity feeder MED
161. e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 92 e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the lid open In the DADF Using the DADF you can load up to 100 sheets of paper 75 g m 20 Ib for one job When you use the DADF e Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than 218 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches e Do not attempt to load the following types of paper carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper torn paper e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics To load an original into the DADF 1 Load the original face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray Loading originals and print media_ 32 2 Adjust the document width guides to the paper size Z Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the p
162. e General tab Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as location date time and more See General settings on page 80 e Setup tab Sets the values for fax network and login Also you can set to enable the feature listed on the screen e Print Report tab Prints configuration or font list and displays a report of machine features See Printing a report on page 89 e Back Returns to the previous screen Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Fuser Kit Feed Roller Kit Tray 1 Feed Roller Kit Tray 2 Feed Roller Kit Tray 3 e Supplies Life tab Displays the remainders or the usage count of the Page Count Page Count Image Count Feed count Feed count Feed count Supply Measure Count machine supplies Use up down arrows to switch screens 79 _Machine status and advanced setup BROWSING THE MACHINE S STATUS You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the machine 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab 2 Machine Status Supplies Life Machine Info Machine Details Tray Status i Print Report i Usage Counters v OPTION DESCRIPTION Machine Details This option shows the customer support information on the email address and the phone number you stored from Admin Setting Also you can check the machine s serial number or the hardware
163. e Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the J ob Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan Job To delete a Job Type setting l Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the I mage Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use these tools to edit the image JA Ba BO Pe p Using Your Printer in Linux 42 You can use the following tools to edit the image Function Saves the image Cancels your last action Restores the action you canceled Allows you to scroll through the image Crops the selected image area Zooms the image out Zooms the image in Allows you to scale the image size you can enter the size manually or set the rate to scale proportionally vertically or horizontally Allows you to rotate the image you can select the number of degrees from the drop down list Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image or to invert the image Shows the properties of the image For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the onscreen hel
164. e com networking bonjour download select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to set network parameters automatically Follow the instructions in the installation window This program does not support Linux Configuring network protocol via the machine You can set up TCP IP network parameters follow the steps listed below l ee Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ 45 Ethernet cable Make sure you have turned on the machine Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Admin Setting When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears Use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Once the password is entered press OK Factory setting 1111 6 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup 4 Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure Select TCP IP Protocol e Apple Talk Protocol This protocol is widely used in Macintosh network environments e Ethernet Speed You can select the communication speed for Ethernet connections Press IP Setting Select Static and then enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway address fields Touch the input area then enter addresses by number keypad on the control panel 2 Admin Setting Naki pa nd General Print Report Copy Setup o Fax Setup Netw
165. e in the following order This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass PPN Gah NG 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Poster Copy Z This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper Supply to Tray 5 Press On to activate this feature 6 Press OK 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Z Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order Clone copying The machine prints multiple original images on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass lt M lt mk lt 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen Copying_ 45 3 Select the tray in Paper Supply 4 Press the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy Z This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are selected as below Duplex to 1 gt 1 Sided Reduce Enlarge to Original 100 Paper
166. e letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next This printer will automatically substitute fonts shown on your screen with similar looking fonts located in the printer To avoid substitution go to the Extras tab of the printer driver and do not check Use Printer Fonts Select a language from the list below English X SAMSUNG e The window above may slightly differ if you are reinstalling the driver Getting Started_ 27 4 Select Typical installation for a network printer and then click Next es SA Select Installation Type en Select type that you want and click Next button c Typical installation for a Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s local printer computer ce Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of machines available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the l
167. e path This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Job Setting Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD Some printers do not support this feature Using Onscreen Help File For more information about Job Setting click at the top right corner of the window The J ob Setting Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the Job Setting About Tab Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver If you have an Internet browser you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon See Printing a Document on page 13 for more information about accessing printer properties Printer Tab If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view the Printer tab You can set the printer configuration The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon Basic Printing 18 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Properties 5 Click the Printer tab and set the options Using a Favorite Setting The Favorites option which is visible on each properties tab allows you to save the current properties settings for future use To save a Favorites item 1 Change the
168. e specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements Loading originals and print media 33 Specification on print media TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT CAPACITY Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches e 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 520 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond for the tray bond paper for the tray Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib for th Iti i j Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches O aa a BG n a ay y 2 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib bond in the high capacity bond for the high capacity fasdar Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches feeder JIS BS 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches Ab 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches Statement 140 x216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Envelope Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm 6 92 x 9 84 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib e 50 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond paper for the tray Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches e 10 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib in h Iti Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches E y Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelop
169. e window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Yes until printing begins The selected overlay downloads with your print job and prints on your document NOTE The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a Page Overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 Inthe printer properties window click the Extras tab 2 Click the Edit button in the Overlay section 3 Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box 4 Click Delete Overlay 5 When a confirming message window appears click Yes 6 Click OK until you exit the Print window 4 Using Windows PostScript Driver If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD ROM to print a document PPDs in combination with the PostScript driver access printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the Supplied software CD ROM Printer Settings You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings neede
170. ears Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files on your computer Then you can fax or e mail the files display them on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using Samsung software or the WIA driver This chapter includes e Using Samsung Easy Document Creator e Scanning Process with TWAIN enabled Software e Scanning Using the WIA Driver NOTES e Check the Operating System s that are compatible with your printer Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi Scanning 28 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Easy Document Creator will provide you with
171. ebsite www samsung com printer to install the printer softwares Samsung s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner drivers providing the ability to print documents and scan images The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned documents After the driver is installed on your Linux system the driver package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously The acquired documents can then be edited printed on the same local or network machine devices sent by e mail uploaded to an FTP site or transferred to an external OCR system The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program You don t need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones Using Your Printer in Linux 35 Installing the Unified Linux Driver Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer Turn both the computer and the machine on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password NOTE You must log in as a Super user root to install the printer software If you are
172. ed plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket E Important warning You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth e Blue Neutral e Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY EUROPEAN COUNTRIES CE Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996
173. ee Printing a Document on page 13 2 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 40 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size or grayscale level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the list 6 When you have finished editing click OK and start printing To stop printing the watermark select No Watermark from the Watermark drop down list Advanced Printing 22 Editing a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK until you exit the Print window Deleting a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Extras tab click
174. eed when using your printer When the printer properties are displayed you can review and change the settings needed for your print job Your printer properties window may differ depending on your operating system This Software User s Guide shows the Properties window for Windows XP Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use If you access printer properties through the Printers folder you can view additional Windows based tabs refer to your Windows User s Guide and the Printer tab see Printer Tab on page 18 NOTES e Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver e The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program To make your changes permanent make them in the Printers folder e The following procedure is for Windows XP For other Windows OS refer to the corresponding Windows User s Guide or online help 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Printers and Faxes 3 Select your printer driver icon 4 Right click on the printer driver icon and select Printing Preferences 5 Change the settings on each tab click OK Layout Tab The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page The Layout Op
175. ely fine detail this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also supports a Super Fine resolution Z For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine Original Type You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option on the screen and press OK e Text For originals with text or line art e Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press the right arrow to enhance the darkness degree and press OK Light Dark el CODD Faxing Optional 63 Erase Background You can lighten reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned colored paper or newspaper originals Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background IS e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo Color Mode You can transmit a fax in color using this feature But this feature only applies when you send a fax
176. emory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine See Supplies on page 118 1 Open the side cover 3 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a click to release the toner cartridge Maintenance_ 93 4 Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out 5 Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag 6 Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 7 Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine 8 Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place 94 Maintenance 9 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a click 10 Close the front cover then the side cover N After replacing the toner cartridge wait for several minutes without powering off until the machine enters to standby mode Otherwise it may cause malfunction of the machine MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT Expected cartridge life The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80 000 pages The screen displays Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one when the life of the imaging unit is almost ended Approximately 6 000 more pages can be made after the wa
177. er from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list Printer Name IP Port Name KS ae lt m gt Update lt Back Cancel e If you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the printer e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item individually 11 NOTE If your printer is not already connected to the computer the following window will appear 3 Connect Device Setup can not find a connected device Check connection between your computer and the printer Please refer to the following connection method 1 Connect the device to your computer 2 Turn on the power of the device 3 If New Hardware Wizard is appeared close it 4 Click Next Cancel e After connecting the printer click Next e If you don t want to connect the printer at this time click Next and No on the following screen Then the installation will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the installation e The reinstallation window that appears in this User s Guide may d
178. er glass for a copy job you can use this feature In the picture below each number means each segment order D Segment 1 from the DADF Q Segment 2 from the scanner D glass Segment 3 from the DADF Segment 4 from the scanner glass Segment 5 from the DADF When the machine enters power saver mode the jobs in the segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Job Build Press On to enable job build function oS NS pi Ready to scan your Job Build segment 2 Copies 001 Advanced E3 tt Job Build 0 Pages A La Multi Bin IDC com E N Up Display Between Poster Copy Segments N NG Copying 43 e Off Disables Job Build feature e On Enables Job Build feature e Display Between Segments After executing a segment the job is paused with this screen is displayed Then the user can select to keep copying or stop e Print Prints the sample page s of a segment to confirm the contents e Delete Deletes a segment e Delete All Deletes all segments e Print All Prints all segments e Add Segment Adds a new segment e Cancel Removes all segments in the list and cancels the job 5 Press Add Segment 6 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a sing
179. es in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment
180. ess in dotted decimal notation or a host name Ne Oe O POB 54 Scanning 9 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 10 If you want to allow the unauthorized person s access to SMB server check Anonymous By default this is unchecked 11 Enter the login name and password 12 Enter the domain name of the SMB server 13 Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned images 14 Configure Scan folder creating policy Filing Policy and File Name 15 Click Apply Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server 1 Press Scan from the Main screen If the authentication message shows enter User Name and Password This message shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 2 Press Scan to Server 3 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can place a single original document face down on the scanner glass 4 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 5 Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab 6 Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the SyncThru Web Service Advanced Image No Server AS i Resolution 1 FirstServerS j i 0 lt 300 dpi gt 2 SecondServerS Duplex FU 3 ThirdServerS 0 lt 1 Sided gt 4 FourthServerS File Name 5 FifthServerS 6 SixthServerS
181. essage pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup 4 Press Redial 5 Select Redial Term and Redial Times 2 Ready General Print Report Copy Setup Fax Setup gt 3 Redial Term am Redial Term 1 15 min Network Setup Ng Ba pren lk patag Redial Times Authentication Optional Service Ly Vv 6 Press OK Redialing the last number 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab 3 Place the originals face up into the DADF 4 Press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers 5 Select a fax number in the list and press OK The machine automatically begins to send Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present 1 Press Fax from the Main screen Place the originals face up in the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Delay Send Press On Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display select Start Time with left right arrows o Md YS 2 Ready to Fax Advanced ee A Original Size a ba Ka a Delay Send Fax Send Job Priority Send On gt StartTime Polling Hour 01 12 Minutes 00 59 Ce en er ey Jo Vv Ce Ces e If you do not
182. f Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must b be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press On 7 Press OK gt SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can be turned on or off 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Fax Ending Sound Press On Press OK O Sa CO Faxing Optional 67 using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes About USB memory Understanding the USB screen Plugging ina USB memory device Scanning to an USB memory device ABOUT USB MEMORY USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution phot
183. fer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 73 e Back Returns to the previous screen If the network authentication is enabled the log off confirmation message popes up and closes Scan to Email NetScan If the authentication for network appears you have to enter user name and password to enter the NetScan screen 9 Ready wy Scan to PC Server Address No Application A 1 Application 2 Application Application 3 4 Application 5 Application 6 Application by e No Lists the number in order for application programs e Application Shows the available application programs from your computer e Select Moves to the application program you have selected 50 Scanning Scan to Server Advanced No Server la Resolution FirstServerS j 7 eq 300 dpi pr SecondServerS lt gt 1 2 3 ThirdServerS 4 FourthServerS 5 FifthServerS Fiangye 6 SbthSenerS e SMB Sends the scanned file to SMB Press SMB for that option e FTP Sends the scanned file to FTP Press FTP for that option e No Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 e Server Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 e Duplex Selects whether the mac
184. fer to your computer user s guide Frequent copy paper jams occur e Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight 75 g m bond paper is recommended e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner e Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner e The machine may be turned on and off frequently e The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle e Scanning has failed e There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished try your job again e The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again e The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off e The scanner drive
185. form Using standard workflow 76 Ready O Favourite My Workform Pol HI Q Filter Input E3 Scan 2 Fax CI Box CI Type v Name a Input Y Transmit v Properties 2 Email GG a Aritra 2 C3 Box jB Fax Arira A Fax ex Oryx Cy Aritra 4 ES Scan s Server K Aritra 5 a Box Print Ci ng Mm Selected 1 Total 16 Workform Type Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not Name Shows the workform name Input Shows the workform s input module name Transmit Shows the workform s transmit module name If two or more modules are added in transmit workform this column displays Multi without any icon Properties Shows the workform s perperties Create Creates a new private workform Delete Deletes the selected workform Edit Lets you to modify a workform Detail Shows detailed workform information Search Searches a workform with a workform name Task Imports a workform from USB export a workform to USB copy or move a workform to public workform It also makes a shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF Execute Start the job defined in the workform Workform Creating Screen You can create a new workform To add a new workform press Create on the My Workform or Public Workform tab 14 You can create maximum 100 workforms Input Tab 14
186. ge e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE If you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide Installing Printer Software in Windows 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership R esesesesceecssoeccsoosscsecssoeesssoeoctsosocsoessoseo I I dlike to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP address l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network a
187. ge 29 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to switch the screen press Tray Management Select tray and its options such as paper size and type Press OK SS Loading originals and print media_ 39 copying This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine This chapter includes e Understanding the Copy screen e Copying originals UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN When you press Copy on the Main screen the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lost of copying options All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily If the screen displays an other menu press E38 to go to the Main screen Basic tab Ready To Copy Copice 001 Basic Advanced Original Size Original Type Paper Supply j mari i yl Text Text Photo Photo o J moej aa ao bas ts ry pE OT Reduce Enlarge lt Original 10095 doj more Liaht Dark Duplex ee COPD 2 Letter 2 lt 1 1Sided gt more 13 EY Letter D 4 Letter B Output heem Uncolated ka more e Original Size Selects the size of the originals See Changing the size of originals on page 41 e Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image See Reducing or enlarging copies on page 42 e Duplex Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper See Copying on both sides of
188. ges on page 47 e Margin Shift Creates a binding edge for the document See Shifting margins on page 47 COPYING ORIGINALS This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals 1 Press Copy from the Main screen 2 Place originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex and more See Changing the size of originals on page 41 see Copying on both sides of originals Duplex on page 42 2 Ready To Copy Basic Advanced Image Original Size Original Type uni rem gt Text Text Photo Photo o more i N Reduce Enlarge j lt Original 10095 gt more Dark Duplex Ma a Y D Ka lt 1 gt 1Sided gt Pmorerl Output x lt Uncollated gt more 4 Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen Paper Supply Enter the number of copies using the number keypad if necessary 5 If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than two copies the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time if you select No the machine starts copying the rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order Because the default value of theOutput option is Collated 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Z To cancel the cu
189. guides 18 darkness copying 43 faxing 63 scanning 56 71 date amp time 29 80 printing date amp time in copied out 80 82 default settings 30 altitude adjustment 81 changing the default settings 30 energy saver 81 language 81 29 machine test 81 80 output option 81 setting a fax header 60 81 tray management 81 29 driver installation 27 duplex copying 42 faxing 63 scanning 55 70 E easy document creator 57 email address entering email addresses to input field 53 Global 53 52 Individual 52 storing 52 energy saver 29 erasing background copying 47 faxing 64 scanning 56 71 erasing punch hole 47 error correction mode 82 error message 105 extension telephone 63 F fax option kit enabling option feature after installing the kit 122 ordering 118 fax receiving changing the receive mode 62 extension telephone 63 in answering machine fax 62 63 secure receiving 63 fax sending automatic resending 61 delay sending 61 60 redialing the last number 61 sending a fax 60 61 62 60 fax setup 82 faxing color mode 64 darkness 63 enabling the fax kit option 88 122 64 original type 63 phonebook 64 91 resolution 63 solving faxing problems 114 FDI Foreign Interface Device ordering 119 finisher Stacker amp Stapler ordering 118 paper jam 104 front cover 18 FTP 54 G general settings 80 Gray scan 56 70 Group Group fax number 64 l ID copy 44 imaging unit 18 imag
190. h a single original document face down 3 Press USB from the Main screen Press Scan to USB 5 Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Changing the scan feature settings on page 70 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning 7 After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine gt SCAN TO USB Basic tab Basic Advanced UHMSC Name Date Filet 20 1 20208 File2 21 2 20209 Resolution lt 100 dpi gt Directory2 23 4 2021 File Name i Directory1 22 3 20210 File3 24 5 20212 mm het Name The folder names on the USB memory device Date Tha date which folders are made Select Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name New Folder Makes a new folder on the USB memory device Detail Views the details of currently selected folder or file Rename Renames the folder or file name Delete Deletes the folder on the USB memory device Duplex Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e File Name Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking this field e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab Advanced Original Size A4 e Original Siz
191. harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment i
192. hat runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double sided of paper Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another
193. he document 74 Using document box Add From Scan Lets you add a new document from scanning Detail Shows a document s information Search Searches a file with a document name or an owner name Edit Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name Delete Deletes the selected document Copy Copies a selected document to another document box Move Moves a selected document to another document box Combine Merge documents located in two or more boxes Send To Sends the selected document s to a destination such as e mail fax server or USB Print Prints the selected document s out e Back Returns to the previous screen STORING DOCUMENTS TO DOCUMENT BOX This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive Storing documents from document box You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 2 Press Document Box from the Main screen 3 Press a document box with which you need to store a document 4 Press Enter 2 Ready be Naya 2 Document Box gt User Box gt UserBoxName Document Name a Owner v Date N First First 11 27 2008 25 Second Second 1 27 2008 26 Third Third 11 27 2008 27 Fourth Fourth 11 27 2008 28 Fifth Fifth 11 27 2008 Selected 0 Total 10 8000 MB Add From Scan 5
194. he number of pages per sheet 40 Using Your Printer in Linux Scanning a Document You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop 2 Click the amp button to switch to Scanners Configuration 3 Select the scanner on the list Unified Driver Configurator Click your scanner Selected scanner Vendor Model Type When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties 5 Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF Automatic Document Feeder or face down on the document glass 6 Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window 41 Using Your Printer in Linux The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane Ka Scanner Properties woes L 4 Color Composition Color 16 Million Colors 243215 MA 0060585 PEO998966 44 210x297 mm FX Drag the pointer to Document Source k T m set the image area to be scanned
195. he paper The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper Tips on using the multi purpose tray e Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray e To prevent paper jams do not add paper when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print media e Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray e Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Selecting print media on page 33 e Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray To load paper in the multi purpose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray and unfold the multi purpose tray extension as shown 2 f you are using paper flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading For transparencies hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems 38 Loading originals and print media 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much or the paper will be bent which will resu
196. he upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Using features Scanning l Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click Scan from the home screen 3 Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start 4 Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options 5 Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview image 6 Select to Save to Location Send to E mail or Send to SNS 7 Click on Save Saving a Scan Send E mailing a Scan or Share Uploading NOTE If there is room on the document glass more than one item can be scanned at the same time Use the i tool to make multiple selection areas Scanning 30 Quick Scanning Configuring Quick Scan To set up the Quick Scan options 1 Click Configuration from the home screen 2 Click on Default to use the default settings or select your own options 3 Click Apply to save changes Using Quick Scan 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click Quick Scan from the home screen 3 Select a save location for the scanned images 4 Click Save to save the image NOTE Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings Scanning to a Social Networking Site Scan Directly l Place a single document face down on the document
197. here are special functions to erase punch holes staple marks and newspaper background e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhanced at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using E mail SMB FTP or Networks scanning e Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email addresses and send the scanned image immediately e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Set a specific time to transmit a Fax Optional e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations J After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting Use USB memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it in various ways with your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored to the device e You can back up data and restore backup files to the machine s memory IPv6 e This machine supports IPv6 FEATURES BY MODELS The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Basic features of this machine include USB 2 0 USB Memory DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder Hard Disk Network Interface Enthernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN Duplex 2 sided printi
198. hine scans on one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 e Resolution Selects the scanning resolution value e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use Z For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 73 e Back Returns to the previous screen Advanced tab Advanced Job Build Off Original Size Auto e Job Build Allows you to scan several originals and then send them in a single email or send them to a server s at once See Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email on page 52 or See Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB FTP server s at once on page 54 e Original Size Sets the originals to a specific fixed size See Original Size on page 55 e Back Returns to the previous screen Image tab cy Ready to Email Basic Advanced Original Type Text Color Mode Mono Danese pong Erase Background Off Scan to Edge Off Original Type Selects whether the original is text or photo See Original Type on page 56 Color Mode Adjusts the color options of the scan output If the original is color and you want to scan in color press Color Mode See Color Mode on page 56 Darkness Adjusts the degree of darkness of the s
199. iffer depending on the printer and interface in use 5 Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next If you installed the printer software for local printing and you select your printer driver name the window asking you to print a test page appears Do as follows a To print a test page select the check box and click Next b If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If it doesn t click No to reprint it 6 When the reinstallation is done click Finish Installing Printer Software in Windows Removing Printer Software l Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Remove and click Next You will see a component list so that you can remove any item individually 4 Select the components you want to remove and then click Next 5 When your computer asks you to confirm your selection click Yes The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer 6 After the software is removed click Finish 12 Installing Printer Software in Windows 2 Basic Printing This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in Windows This chapter includes e Printing a Document e Printing to a file PRN e Printer Settings Layout Tab Paper Tab Graphics Tab Extras Tab About Tab Printer Tab Using a Favorite Setting Using Help Printing a Document NOTES e
200. ight remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING B
201. iginals the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the values e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals e Staple Portrait Adds a single staple to all of your portrait oriented output N e Staple Landscape Adds a single staple to all of your landscape oriented output NI w il 5 4 The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker amp stapler See Stacker amp Stapler Finisher on page 118 Selecting the type of originals Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type Original Type Tet Text Photo Photo e Text Use for originals containing mostly text e Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs e Photo Use when originals are photographs Changing the darkness This defines the degree of darkness Use left right arrows to change the level of light dark in the printouts Light Dark gt cel CO USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen you can select specific copy features Merging multiple jobs as a single copy This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy For example if you need to use the DADF and the scann
202. ill get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership ecccecccococsccecccccccceccescecccsceectscecccceesseee 6 NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Custom Installation You can choose individual components to install 1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next es x It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English w Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list Installing Printer Software in Windows 4 Select Custom installation
203. imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 The toner cartridge is totally empty Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 A paper jam has occurred See Clearing paper jams on page 99 The cover is opened Close the cover There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message See Understanding display messages on page 105 14 Check the message on the display screen and follow the instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part See Troubleshooting on page 97 If the problem persists call for service Introduction_ 21 MENU OVERVIEW The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine Setup Job Status or touching menus on the display screen Refer to the following diagram Main screen The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel Some menus are grayed out depending on your model a a KA oe BT Basic tab Page 40 Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex Output Original Type Darkness Paper Supply Advanced tab Page 40 ID Copy N Up Poster Copy Clone Copy Book Copy Booklet Covers Transparencies WaterMark Overlay Auto Crop Image tab Page 41 Erase Edge Erase Background Margin Shift
204. impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its P address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it
205. includes e Scanning basics e Understanding the Scan screen e Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution SCANNING BASICS Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital files There are two ways to scan originals one is using the USB cable to directly connect the machine with your computer and the other is using the network scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination via the network e Network Scan Sends the document to your networked computer via the Network Scan program You can scan an image from the machine if it is connected to the network and send it to the computer where Network Scan is running e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process See Software section This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Software section e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB cable See Soft
206. ine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet e f your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth You can dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the transfer unit The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its printing quality The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10 000 pages printing 1 Prepare a soft lint free cloth 2 Turn off the machine 3 Unplug the power cable 4 Open the side cover 5 Wipe the surface of the transfer unit 92 Maintenance EN VAS 6 Close the side cover 7 Plug the power cable and turn the machine on Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is
207. ing unit reorder notification 91 Individual email addresses for scanning 52 individual fax number 64 129 jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area 103 102 100 101 104 103 99 98 tips for avoiding paper jams 97 jam clear document 97 JPEG 57 71 K keyboard 30 L language 29 LED Interrupt 21 Power Saver 20 Status 21 Linux problems 115 loading originals ADF 32 scanner glass 32 M Machine Info 79 Machine Setup 79 machine status 80 Maintenance imaging unit 94 maintenance parts 96 toner cartridge 93 94 memory DIMM installing 120 memory module installing 120 ordering 118 message on the display screen 105 Mono 56 70 multi purpose tray 18 N NetScan 53 network setting up 25 84 N up copy 45 130 O OCR 57 71 On Hook Dial sending a fax 61 optional service 88 optional tray 18 118 original size copying 41 scanning 55 70 Original type copying 43 faxing 63 scanning 56 70 originals jam clear 97 loading 32 output options 81 P paper changing the size 36 99 loading in the multi purpose tray 38 37 paper feeding problems 108 paper type setting 39 phonebook fax 64 65 polling deleting the polling document 65 polling a remote fax 65 storing the originals for polling 65 PostScript problems 114 Power Save 29 Power Saver 20 hardware 20 using power save mode 29 81 print quality problems solve 110 print report accounting reports 89 configur
208. int 7 Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling 8 Give the Passcode to the receiver Printing Deleting the polling document 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Print or Delete 3 Enter Passcode 4 Press OK Polling a remote fax This option allows you to retrieve poll a fax which is stored in the remote machine 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Poll from Remote 2 Ready to Fax pi o Advanced Image Original Size ci E Store Poll from Remote Delay Send Priority Send E P m Delay Poll From Polling jm Vv Z Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific time within 24 hours 3 Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on the control panel You have to be informed Passcode from sender with the remote fax machine 4 Press OK PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is successfully completed or not 4 The detailed information is available in advanced setup part See Printing a report on page 89 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Print Report tab gt Report gt Fax Report g
209. int job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 From the Paper tab select Fit to Page in the Printing Type drop down list 3 Select the correct size from the Output size drop down list 4 Select the paper source size and type in Paper Options 5 Click OK and print the document Using Watermarks The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you may want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer and they can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an Existing Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 2 Click the Extras tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK and start printing NOTE The preview image shows how the page will look when it is printed Creating a Watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access printer properties S
210. inted side of the page at even intervals e The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several times to clean the cartridge contact a service representative After the printout if you still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages e The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter weight paper See Specification on print media on page 34 e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture e f background scatter occurs on an envelope change the
211. ist and then click Next Select Printer Port Select a port that will be used for your printer TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below If you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name NOTE If a firewall has been enabled on this PC this may be preventing Update the installer from detecting the printer Temporarily disable the firewall on this PC before continuing with the installation lt Back Next gt Cancel e If you do not see your machine on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your machine to the network To add the machine to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the machine To verify your machine s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page See Printing a report on page 89 e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button If you are not sure of the IP address contact your network administrator or print network information See Printing a report on page 89 6 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es a
212. it may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Change the printer option and try again Go to printer properties click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper Refer to the Software section for details An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your printer is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging You can set this option through Paper or Printer tab in printer driver s properties See Altitude adjustment on page 28 Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 34 e Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 e Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Copying problems CONDITION SUGGESTE
213. ite on page 96 Press Scan to Email Set the scan features in the Advanced Image or Output tabs See Advanced tab on page 50 Press the Basic tab to enter the email address Advanced Image From abc def com A Address ma Local j Global Cc aS lt gt Bee Resolution Subject lt 300 dpi j gt Message File Name Ww e From Sender s address Touch From and then the keyboard pops up on the screen Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email addresses Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses easily See Global on page 53 e To Cc Bcc Recipient s email address manually with the pop up keyboard or by pressing Local or Global Local or Global addresses are pre loaded address lists from your computer or the LDAP server which is configured at Web UI See Global on page 53 e Subject Title of email e Message Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email The maximum size is 1KB Z To delete previously entered contents press Remove All Scanning_ 51 6 Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution e Duplex Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side only or on both sides e Resolution Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left right arrows Press the Start button to scan and send the file 7 While the machine is sending an email you cannot do the copy job either sending a fax
214. ka KANAN AKA AA DAANAN A NAN 27 SEMNE UND a CENT COMPILED sarro A ANA GANG 27 7 Scanning Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 00222000 3 28 Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator 222000 2 aa 28 UDIT IU S aaa NANA KAPG NG PLANE DANG E 30 PIGAIN AA AA AA AA AGA NANA 31 Scanning Process with TWAI N enabled Software ener 31 Scanning Using the WIA Driver 220 000000 cccc cece cee eee eee eee en eee ee ee nee Eee Eee DEAE EE EDDA EEE ESSE SESE SESS EEE EEE EEEEE EES 31 NANGONS AP CINEE 200S GANANG AA ANG 32 WINOOWS VITA AY 32 NINONG E T E E E EE E T T EE E EE EE ET ET 32 8 Using Smart Panel Understanding Smart Panel 0022200004 22 rrr EEE D DEES EE ESD E EEE ESSE EEE ESSERE EE ES 33 Opening The Troubleshooting GUN arsasincssuaanaiererareasaresyeracineessareavaveaseuaqatianseeansie ev ireeeruseeeenis 34 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings 02220004 4000 cess eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeegganeeteeuagngs 34 9 Using Your Printer in Linux SE I PSI KI AA AA AA APAPAP at AA KA 35 Installing the Unified Linux Driver 2200 022 1 cee ceee eens eee e ee ee eee ee eens eee e sees eeeeeeaseeeeeessaneeeeeggaaneneeggs 35 Installing the Unified LINUX Driver ccc cece ccc ec eee cece eee cesses ee ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeneeeengas 36 Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver u 222 00 cece cee e eee e tessa scene eseeeeeeessaeeeeeesgeneeeeeganeeeeegas 37 Using the Unified Driver
215. l iY e Using SyncThru Web Service administrators can classify users into several groups according to each user s role Each user s authorization authentication and accounting will be controlled by the group s role definition For example if a group A only has authorization to use the copy function users in group A can only copy with the machine they cannot fax or scan You can set this feature from SyncThru Web Service Click Security gt User Access Control gt Authority e When the Single Sign On SSO feature is enabled users just need to log in to the service only one time Then the system automatically checks the user s authority based on the user ID and password The SSO feature is related to all of the security functions such as authentication authorization and accounting The SSO feature can be configured from SyncThru Web Service Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 And click Security 5 User Access Control gt Authentication gt Options OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Authentication Method No Authentication It disables Authentication Method OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Local Authentication It enables the local authentication mode The user ID and password is stored in an internal storage of the device The administrator can see the user information from the SyncThru Web Service gt Security
216. le original document face down 7 Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts scanning 8 Repeat step 5 to step 7 As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains you can add segments without any restriction 9 After adding segments press Print All ID card copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 4 The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature 1 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy Press Start on the control panel Then the machine starts scanning the front side eee 44 Copying 6 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 7 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying i e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed e If this option is grayed out select the Duplex option to 1 gt 1 Sided the Output option to Collated
217. le the problem You may see an exclamation mark W or a cross mark MI on the upper left of the display in that case press the question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies 2 pi 01 01 2003 12 00 AM Lap MESSAGE yyy is worn Replace with new one DC motor does not operate zzz Please turn off then on Did not supply enough toner Remove seal tape amp reinstall Did not supply enough toner Please open close door Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax Job Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax Job Finisher door is open Close it Finisher error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser error zzz Please turn off then on Fuser unit is not installed correctly Install it Imaging unit is empty Replace it MEANING The life of the part expires totally There is a problem in the control of DC motor unit Not supplied toner to the imaging unit The machine received several papers with many images and it cannot supply the toner properly There is no more available fax memory No more fax data can be received Available fax memory is now 1MB The finisher cover is not securely latched There is a problem in the finisher unit There is a problem in the fuser unit working The fuser unit is not installed or correctly The toner in the imaging unit has run out SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Replace the part
218. learing document jams on page 97 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 97 Check the document size whether it is supported See DADF document size on page 123 Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 97 Clear the jam See Clearing document jams on page 97 MESSAGE Original paper jam inside of scanner Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path Paper Jam at the top of duplex path Paper Jam in exit area Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jam inside finisher Paper Jam in MP tray Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper Jam in tray 2 HCF Paper Jam in tray 3 Paper Jam in tray 3 HCF Paper Jam in tray 4 Paper jam inside finisher s duplex MEANING The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the gate sensor within the correct time after actuating the scan sensor When the machine is on jammed paper is detected in the DADF The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the duplex sensor within the correct time when the document was fed the wrong way Paper jammed in the stacker exit part Paper has jammed during duplex printing SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed original See Clearing document jams on page 97
219. lect the appropriate altitude value 5 Click Apply China only OEH FH 2000mVA F HBX 24H 2000m KN Tora KONG AN Aral AN GO HA ON GOW crete 1 gasa he AN AKIT 200004 F NGYN Fax gq AN IT HA YN ag paola Lalas yatabaas Mos Miya 0355 xna 2000 aaa Dan hab yungh youq gy digih haijbaz 2000 m doxroengz haenx ancienz sawjyungh Setting the authentication password To set your machine up or change the settings you have to login To change password follow the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password Touch the password input area then the question marks appears use the number keypad on the control panel to enter the password Then press OK Factory setting 1111 4 Press the Setup tab gt Authentication 5 Press Change Admin Password CP Admin Setting 7 General Print Report an ore Copy Setup Fax Setup Old Password Network Setup New Password m pamamaraang Authentication Confirm Password Optional Service Vv 6 Enter old and new password and then confirm the new password 7 Press OK Setting the date and time When you set the time and date they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print also they are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for correct time being If power to the machine is cut off you need
220. lects the file format of the scan output See File Policy on page 71 e Back Returns to the previous screen CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan Job such as resolution duplex original size type color mode darkness and more The options you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values Duplex This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned are two sided You can select whether the machine scans only one side of the paper or both sides of the paper Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Duplex Use left right arrows to toggle the values Duplex lt 1 Sided j gt e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 For originals that are printed on both sides But the back is rotated 180 degrees 4 To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 you have to load the originals on the DADF Because if the machine can not detect the original on DADF automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Resolution You can adjust document resolution Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution
221. ll Original Erase Erases 0 25 6mm from the edge of the copies The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature e Hole Punch Erase Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of the copies e Book Center and Edges Erase Erases shadows of a binding or book edge from the center and side edges of the copies This feature only applies when you do copying a book See Book copying on page 46 If you have set the Book Copy option to Off you cannot use Book Center and Edges Erase 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing background images This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the background as in newspapers or catalogs 1 Load the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Erase Background 4 Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background is e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is 5 Press OK 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Shifting margins You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page H A aL Y HA pa 1 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Lo
222. ller you can create several workforms for each caller s ID Auto redirection If the fax transmission failed the machine re sends the fax image to the user s email address 4 Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 89 Delayed start feature You can schedule the job s execution time by setting Delay Start in Properties tab when you creating a workform Notification feature You can notify the job processing result to an email Z Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 89 Approval feature Before executing the transmit module you can get approval from an administrator 4 Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 89 78 _Using standard workflow machine status and advanced setup This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes Machine Setup Browsing the machine s status General settings Copy Setup Fax Setup MACHINE SETUP 1
223. low the next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Receive Start Code Select On 5 Press left right arrows to display number 9 gt Receive Start Code 0 9 p o aa 6 Press OK Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive Select On 5 Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the control panel gt Z To deactivate the Secure Receive feature press Off In this case the received fax will be printed out Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the
224. lt i 300 dpi gt Original Size The machine senses and determines the size of the original Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK mn AA Letter D Be _ JIS B5 _ Statement 70 Using USB memory device Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Original Type Select the appropriate option and press OK Jie __ Text Photo Photo e Text For originals that have text or line art e Text Photo For originals that have both text and photographs together e Photo For originals that are continuous tone photographs Color Mode Use this option to scan the original in Mono Gray or Color mode Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select the appropriate option and press OK _ Color Je mm Mono e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output If your original document is light or faded press the right a
225. lt in a paper jam or skew iY Depending on the media type you are using keep the following loading guidelines e Envelopes Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side e Transparencies Print side up and the top with the adhesive strip entering the machine first e Labels Print side up and top short edge entering the machine first e Preprinted paper Design side up with the top edge toward the machine e Card stock Print side up and the short edge entering the machine first e Previously printed paper Previously printed side down with an uncurled edge toward the machine 5 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray See Setting the paper size and type on page 39 for copying and faxing or the Software section for PC printing K The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the control panel 6 After printing fold the multi purpose tray extension and close the multi purpose tray SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE After loading paper in the paper tray you need to set the paper size and type These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes For PC printing you need to select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your PC 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on pa
226. m Telephone line PREPARING TO FAX Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to another If you want to add fax feature to the machine check the option lists See Fax option kit on page 118 and contact the purchasing point to order When you purchase a fax kit install the kit by following the steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit After installing the fax kit set the machine to use this feature See Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit on page 122 59 Faxing Optional Using the polling option Printing a report after sending a fax Sending a fax in toll save time Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job Forwarding a received fax to other destination UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN To use the fax feature press Fax on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press E39 to go to the Main screen 2 01 01 2008 12 00 AM Copies 001 Toner Info J LCD Brightness English If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the Main screen Basic tab Fax No 919986187 Advanced Image Be Address Book d2 Individual Group 3 Duplex M4 gi 1 Sided gt M5 HO E us z6 eee a lt S
227. machine See Rear view on page 18 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax iY e If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings e If your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine or the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation e While the machine is receiving a fax you can not do the copy job Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again To change the 9 to for example 3 X fol
228. main as a previous step 8 Click on Apply Dam o Enabling network authentication by SMB 1 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 Select Security gt External Authentication Server gt SMB Server Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers Enter the domain that is used for SMB login Select IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 7 Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step 8 Click on Apply DUA NM Z Users can add up to 6 alternate domains Enabling network authentication by LDAP 1 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 2 Select Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server e Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers 3 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine 4 Log into the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 5 Click Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server 6 Select IP Address or Host Name 7 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as
229. me name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Policy e Rename If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on USB as you store new job information Using USB memory device_ 71 PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files Direct Print option supported file types PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory See Software section to learn how to create a PRN file BMP BMP Uncompressed TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline JPEG JPEG Baseline PDF PDF 1 4 and below To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it Press USB from the Main screen Use up down arrows until the file you want appears Select the file name If there is a folder select folder name and p
230. ment with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen Scanning 57 ic printin This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Printing a document PRINTING A DOCUMENT Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh or Linux applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use For details about printing see Software section CANCELING A PRINT JOB If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler such as the printer group in Windows delete the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings and then Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista 2008 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 and Vista double click your machine For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing 4 From the Document menu select Cancel Z You can also access this window by simply double clicking the printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop You can also cancel the current job by
231. n a server select the Setting up this printer on a server checkbox 7 After the installation is finished a window appears asking you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from Samsung If you so desire select the corresponding checkbox es and click Finish Otherwise just click Finish Setup Completed On line Registration You will get the opportunity to receive free newsletters with exclusive tips and promotions Also you will get more customer care Would you like to register for the Samsung Printer Membership R occcecccsceccoseoccccoecoscccsococssoossesoecoseeessoe I d like to print a test page NOTE After setup is complete if your printer driver doesn t work properly reinstall the printer driver See Reinstalling Printer Software on page 11 Installing Printer Software in Windows Reinstalling Printer Software You can reinstall the software if installation fails 1 Start Windows 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name Maintenance 3 Select Repair and click Next 4 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port em Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port C Shared Printer UNC C Add TCP IP Port Select a print
232. n the power save mode Interrupt button When you press this button the machine goes into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job When the urgent copy job completes the previous printing job continues STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode Blue On The machine is in interrupt printing mode Interrupt mode is resumed at default value Off after the machine is shut down or reset UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED When the problem occurs the Status LED indicates the machine s condition by the light color of it s action STATUS DESCRIPTION Off The machine is off line The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any button is pressed it switches to on line automatically Green Blinking When the backlight slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer When the backlight blinks rapidly the machine is printing data On The machine is on line and can be used Red Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes The toner cartridge is low Order a new toner cartridge You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 93 The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan Remove the old
233. n the template list table 8 Press ES and select Copy 9 Press the Advanced tab gt ID Copy gt Mamual ID Copy Setup 10 Press the template you have saved from the template list 11 Press the Start button on the control panel now follow the instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images 2 up or 4 up copying N up The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper 2 or 4 up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF Po a 2 7 i ja LILA B Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt N Up Select Off 2Up or 4Up e Off Copies an original onto one sheet of paper e 2Up Copies two separate originals onto one page e 4Up Copies four separate originals onto one page 6 Press Start on the control panel O AON Z You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Each portion is scanned and printed on by on
234. n you press On Hook Dial to send a fax you can hear a specific tone To adjust the tone volume you can use this feature Value 1 is the lowest volume Use left right arrows to adjust the value Output Tray This feature lets you select the paper tray to use for receiving a fax a Private Automatic Branch Exchange Machine status and advanced setup 83 NETWORK SETUP You may set up the network with the machine s touch screen Before doing that you must have the information concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to use contact your network administrator to configure this machine network 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK 3 Press the Setup tab gt Network Setup 2 Ready General Setup Print Report Copy Setup TCP IP F E Protocol E aa ng Fax Setup Network Set letwork Setup Apple Talk mm 3021x Protocol il Authentication Ethernet Optional Service Mm Speed E IPv6 v W OPTION DESCRIPTION TCP IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment 77 There are lots of parameters to be set g therefore if you are not sure leave as it is or consult the network administrator Apple Talk For Macintosh network environments select this
235. n you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode refer to next steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login message pops up then enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup gt Fax Initial Setup gt Receive Mode 4 Select the option e Telephone Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start e Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode e Answering Machine Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax 5 Press OK When the memory is full the machine can no longer receive any incoming fax Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored in the memory Receiving manually in Telephone mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The machine begins receiving a fax Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attache an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your
236. nce exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
237. nd before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM slot Use this DIMM slot to install additional memory Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM See Memory module on page 118 Installing a memory module 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you 1 control board cover 3 Take out anew memory DIMM from the plastic bag Replacing the Stapler Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit Holding the memory module by the edges align the memory module on the slot at about a 30 degree tilt Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other Z The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM and its slot Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a click Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be damaged If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly carefully try the previous procedure again Installing accessories_ 120 6 i Replace the control board cover Reconnect the power cord and printer cable
238. nd click Finish 28 Getting Started iY e If your machine does not work properly after the installation try to reinstall the printer driver See Software section e During the printer driver installation process the driver installer detects the location information for your operating system and sets the default paper size for your machine If you use a different Windows location you must change the paper size to match the paper you usually use Go to printer properties to change the paper size after installation is complete MACHINE S BASIC SETTINGS After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value find the altitude where you are using the machine 1 Normal 2 High 1 3 High 2 4 High 3 1 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web site of your machine 2 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 3 Click Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt Altitude Adj 4 Se
239. nd powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 9 3 Click Next lt 7 It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select 4 lanquage from the list below English v Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Custom installation Click Next Select Installation Type em Select type that you want and click Next button Typical installation for a local printer Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s computer 7 Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares for a device that is on network O Custom installations fou can select installation options This option is recommanded for
240. nd your printer name in Model Name eFor MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model eFor MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 6 Click Add Using Your Printer with a Macintosh For a USB connected 1 Follow the instructions on Installing Software on page 43 to install the PPD file on your computer 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities and Print Setup Utility e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 open System Preferences from the Applications folder and click Printer amp Fax 3 Click Add on the Printer List e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 press the icon then a display window will pop up 4 For MAC OS 10 3 select the USB tab eFor MAC OS 10 4 click Default Browser and find the USB connection eFor MAC OS 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the USB connection 5 Select your printer name 6 For MAC OS 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name eFor MAC OS 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name in Model e For MAC OS 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your printer name in Print Using Your machine ap
241. ng FAX FEATURES SCX 6555N O Included O Optional Blank Not Available ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This user s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media The following table offers the conventions of this guide CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine Start Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine 7 The date format may differ from function and feature country to country Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical Do not touch the green underside of damage or malfunction N the print cartridge gt Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order Copy gt the Advanced tab gt Clone Copy The example means press Copy from the Main screen press the Advanced tab and then press Clone Copy Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute See page 1 for more information Used to guide users to the reference page for the additi
242. ng originals and print media on page 32 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Auto Crop Press On to activate this feature Press OK Press Start on the control panel to begin copying 48 Copying Multi Bin You can choose the output mode for printouts Z You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2 Bin Finisher or 4 Bin Mailbox 1 Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Advanced tab gt Multi Bin 3 Select the appropriate option e Mailbox Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set If you set the mailbox to Bin3 printouts will be stacked in Bin3 e Job Separator Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in each bin However if there is a vacant bin left the vacant bin has priority which means prinouts will be stacked there first e Collator Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of originals in each bin e Stacker Printouts are stacked in bins one by one When Bin1 is full printouts will be stacked in Bin2 4 Press OK scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer Then you can fax or email the files upload them to your website or use them to create projects that you can print This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination This chapter
243. ng the serial number Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Sending the toner reorder notification Checking Document Box Cleaning your machine Cleaning the outside Cleaning the inside Cleaning the transfer unit Cleaning the scan unit Maintaining the Toner cartridge Toner cartridge storage Handling instructions Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Replacing the toner cartridge Maintaining the imaging unit Expected cartridge life Replacing the imaging unit Maintenance Parts Managing your machine from the website To access SyncThru Web Service Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing document jams Misfeed of exiting paper Roller misfeed Clearing paper jams In the tray 1 In the optional tray In the optional high capacity feeder In the multi purpose tray contents ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLING ACCESSORIES SPECIFICATIONS GLOSSARY INDEX 103 103 103 104 In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge In the paper exit area In the duplex unit area In the stacker finisher 105 Understanding display messages 108 Solving other problems 108 108 109 110 112 113 113 114 114 115 115 117 118 118 119 120 120 120 121 121 122 123 123 124 124 124 Touch screen problem Paper feeding problems Printing problems Printing quality problems Copying problems Scanning problems Network Scan problems Fax problems Common PostScript
244. nguage PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal matrix printer and page printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used on a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit
245. nner Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path 106 Troubleshooting MEANING SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine The imaging unit is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not connected The imaging unit is at the end of its life When the imaging unit replacement message appears on the screen and if you select Continue this message displays Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists please call for service Replace a imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 There is a problem in the control of LSU unit Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service There is a problem in the control of motor unit The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the registration sensor Oversized document or double feeding of originals The originals are jammed in DADF Paper has jammed during duplex printing in the DADF Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists please call for service Open the DADF cover and remove jammed original See C
246. nto an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help A Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to oper ate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada FAX BRANDING The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make chang
247. nux OS see Software section K e You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected to a network e The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating system If you are using Macintosh or Linux See Software section e If you are in a non static IP address environment and need to setup a DHCP network protocol go to the http developer apple com networking bonjour download select the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating system and install the program This program will allow you to fix the network parameter automatically Follow the instruction in the installation window This Bonjour program does not support Linux e You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP Installing the program 1 Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close the window Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive X represents the name of your CD ROM drive Double click Application gt SetIP Open the folder of the language you plan to use Double click Setup exe to install this program Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation gd oS o 30 Getting Started Setting network values 1 Print the machine s network configuration report to find your machine s MAC address See Printing a report on page 89 2 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs 5 Samsung Network Printer Utilities gt SetIP 3 Click KE to
248. o store the fax again Please call for service Blank areas appear You may have chosen the wrong paper at the bottom of each settings in the user option setting For details page or on other about paper settings See Setting the paper pages with a small size and type on page 39 strip of text at the top Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are being used Z To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PostScript errors occur open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section POSSIBLE PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION PostScript file The PostScript e Install the PostScript cannot be driver may not be driver referring to printed installed correctly Software section e Printa configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing e Ifthe problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check The print job was You might need to reduce the Error message too complex complexity of the page or appears install more memory A PostScript The print job may Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine error page prints not be PostScript Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device
249. ocket on the back of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine See Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone on page 63 Error Mode Correction It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other ECM equipped fax machines Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for Telephone Fax or Answering Machine Fax and Dial Mode at either Pulse Dial Pulse or Tone Multi Frequency When you select Answering Machine Fax you can receive a fax while the line is being used by the answering machine See Changing the receive modes on page 62 Contact your local telephone company for Dial Mode setting information Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Receive Header Use this option to automatically print the page number date and time of fax reception at the bottom of each page OPTION DESCRIPTION Secure Receive You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people This feature restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended If you select this option to On all incoming faxes go into memory A four digit Passcode is used when you want to print out received faxes in memory See
250. of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and
251. ographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device e Print data stored on a USB memory device e Format the USB memory device UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN To use the USB feature press USB on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press EA to go to the Main screen 01 01 2008 12 00 AM Copies 001 AA a Toner Info LCD Brightness English When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine USB icon shows on the display screen Press USB Format USB Print or Scan to USB j UHMSC3 Name Date A USB Format f Fie1 20 1 20208 El ee 0220200 USB Print Directory1 22 3 20210 m Scan to USB Directory2 23 4 2021 Files 24 5 20212 Select New Folder Detail Rename Delete e USB Format You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device e Scan to USB e Changing the scan feature settings e Printing from a USB memory device e USB Print You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG PDF and PRN files See Printing from a USB memory device on page 72 e Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job See Scan to USB
252. on The Set IP Address window appears Do as follows Set IP Address em You can set or change IP address for the network printer IP Address MAC Address a Li _ lt m Em Anformation Update Printer MAC Address IP Address Configure Subnet Mask Default Gateway Cancel a Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list b Configure an IP address subnet mask and gateway for the printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP address for the network printer c Click Next 10 6 Select the components to be installed After selecting the components the following window appears You can also change the printer name set the printer to be shared on the network set the printer as the default printer and change the port name of each printer Click Next Set Printer em Change printer settings to be installed _Piinter Name Pot Default Printer Shared Name Name Field lf you want other users on the network to access this printer click the check box in Share Name field and enter a share name that users will easily identify If you want this printer to O You can change the printer name by selecting the name and entering a new name in the Printer be the default printer click the button in Default field Setting up this printer on a server Next gt Cancel To install this software o
253. on page 69 PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector a N D O X s Use only a metal shielded USB memory device lt P 9 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of your machine Using USB memory device_ 68 A N e Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use s misuse e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory device When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan setting See Changing the scan feature settings on page 70 Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass wit
254. onal detailed information See page for more information FINDING MORE INFORMATION You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or onscreen Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine Online User s Guide Provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and installing accessories This user s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in various operating systems and how to use the included software utilities Printer Driver Help Jo are tyo Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing To access a printer driver help screen click Help from the printer properties dialog box Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support printer drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsungprinter com fetv information IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS What the icons and signs in this user manual mean Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death
255. only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box will be displayed To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The document has printed but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS 10 3 2 Update your Mac OS to OS 10 3 3 or higher Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the Cover page When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in
256. ons K e When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop before the machine start transmission Or press the Job Status button and select the job you want to delete press Delete e If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page e While the machine is sending a fax you can not send an email at the same time See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 51 Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up into the DADF Adjust the document settings in the Image tab Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab Press On Hook Dial on the control panel Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel e f the number is which you have dialed recently press the Redial Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers and select a fax number 7 Press Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine et i a 4 Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually See Color Mode on page 64 Automatic resending When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts refer to the next following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Select Admin Setting When the login m
257. oose Booklet Printing from the Layout Type drop down list NOTE The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout Type drop down list on the Layout tab is activated 3 Click the Paper tab and select the paper source size and type Click OK and print the document After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on Both Sides of Paper You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper Before printing decide how you want your document oriented The options are e Printer Setting if you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the printer If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature e None e Long Edge which is the conventional layout used in book binding e Short Edge which is the type often used with calendars NI j A a A t go a LIZ MT 3 Sz Long Edge Short Edge e Reverse Duplex Printing allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature NOTE Do not print on both sides of labels transparencies envelopes
258. open the TCP IP configuration window 4 Enter the network card s MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply When you enter the MAC address enter it without a colon 5 Click OK and then the machine prints the network information Check all the settings are correct 6 Click Exit UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD You can enter alphabet characters numbers or special symbols using the keyboard on the touch screen This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard below is the default showing the lowercase letters EU a GG Gs a a a GG a a HAHAHAHA Tia Tad LATTE ELIT eT ITT1L1 LT TT Symbols pra 1 Left Right oa the cursor between characters in the input 2 Backspace inl the character on the left side of the 3 Delete na the character on the right side of the 4 Clear Deletes all characters in the input area 5 Input area Enters letters within this line Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase 6 eh keys or vice versa Symbols SAB Mant alphanumeric keyboard to the Space Enters a blank between characters 5 OK Saves and closes input result Cancel Cancels and closes input result Z If you enter the email address then the keyboar
259. or scanning documents with text or text and images e Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner Favorites User created favorites for frequently used scan settings Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety of social networking sites SNS Scan an image directly or select an existing image to upload to Facebook Flickr Picasa Google Docs or Twitter NOTE SNS Upload will only be available after Microsoft A NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 has been installed http www microsoft com download en details aspx id 22 and Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7 0 or higher are required Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one e book or convert existing files into an e book format epub file Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is installed Send Fax NOTE If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not installed this will be grayed out 7 Confiquration Provides the options for a 3 Common and Quick Scan Shows the scanning faxing device ready to use If you cannot see any device ready to use Click this button to find a device Search NOTE Click Search Now to automatically search for all devices to which you have access NOTE Click the Help button from t
260. or a regular telephone share the line with your machine e If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores e When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number e This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines e This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG FOR UK ONLY Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Please contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the mould
261. ork Setup Authentication Optional Service DHCP IP Address 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 BOOTP Subnet Mask e C Gateway 000 000 000 000 Static i NA CC 10 Press OK 26 Getting Started iY You can also set up the network settings through the network administration programs e SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based printer management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com e SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network print server which allows you to Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments Customize machine settings Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning to email Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning to the FTP or SMB servers Customize printer copy and fax settings e SetIP Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See Using the SetIP program on page 30 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Windows REQUIREM
262. p 10 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built in USB interface or a 10 100 Base TX network interface card When you print a file from a Macintosh computer you can use the PostScript driver by installing the PPD file NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface Make sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User s Guide This chapter includes e Installing Software e Setting Up the Printer e Printing e Scanning 43 Installing Software The PostScript driver CD ROM that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file to use the PS driver Apple LaserWriter driver for printing on a Macintosh computer Also it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh computer Printer driver Installing the printer driver 1 Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable or the Ethernet cable 2 Turn on your computer and the machine Insert the PostScript driver CD ROM which came with your machine into the CD ROM drive Double click the Samsung MFP on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_ Installer folder Double click the MAC_ Printer folder Double click the Samsung MFP Installer OSX icon Click Continue Click Install 10 After the installation is finished click Quit O On O UI Uninstalling the printer driver 1 Insert the CD RO
263. paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Software section e You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper See Software section Save time and money e To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing See Software section Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their memory See Installing a memory DIMM on page 120 e A Network interface enables network printing Your machine comes with a built in network interface 10 100 1000 Base TX e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Emulation PS enables PS printing Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136PS3 fonts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc a2 will To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper asi e This machine automatically conserves electricity by SS substantially reducing power consumption when not in use Print in various environments e You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux and Macintosh systems e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in several formats e You can create a booklet using sequential 2 sided document production e T
264. pears on the Printer List and is set as the default printer 7 Click Add 45 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing NOTES e The Macintosh printer s properties window that appears in this User s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use However the composition of the printer properties window is similar e You can check your printer name in the supplied CD ROM Printing a Document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer software setting in each application you use Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling and other options and click OK Settings Page Attributes E Format for Ha SS ee e Make sure that your aper size pus Tere CIA 21 59 cm CU I Orientation Na E Scale 100 7 pos J i EET 3 Cancel Ok Mac OS 10 3 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print when you finish setting the options 46 Changing Printer Settings You can use advanced printing features when using your printer From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu The printer name which appears in the printer properties win
265. possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other consumer will encounter device busy response This can usually happen while starting scan procedure and appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem you should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should wait for completion of the current job or should press Release port button if you are sure that the present port s owner is not functioning properly 116 Troubleshooting CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine does not scan Check if a document is loaded into the machine Check if your machine is connected to the computer Make sure if it is connected properly if I O error is reported while scanning Check if the port is not busy Since functional components of MFP printer and scanner share the same O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different consumer application to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts
266. priate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background IS e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt Quality J Normal m Draft When you set Color Mode to Mono the Quality option is grayed out File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format Me e __ Single Page TIFF __ XPS __ Mutti Page TIFF e PDF Scans originals in PDF format You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification To add the Digital Signature you have to create the certification from the SyncThru Web Service Log in
267. printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems e f background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in printer properties Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e Clean the inside of the machine Contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 34 e Remove the imaging unit and then install a new one See Replacing the imaging unit on page 94 Misformed characters e If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper See Specification on print media on page 34 e If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service Contact a service representative Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Specification on print media on page 34 e Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Troubleshooting_ 111 CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS Curl or wave e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can c
268. problems Common Windows problems Common Linux problems Common Macintosh problems Supplies Accessories How to purchase Precautions to take when installing accessories Installing a memory DIMM Installing a memory module Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties Replacing the Stapler Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit General specifications Printer specifications Copier specifications Scanner specifications Facsimile specifications optional 17 introduction These are the main components of your machine This chapter includes Printer overview Control panel overview Understanding the Status LED PN e e e e PRINTER OVERVIEW Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons e Menu overview e Supplied software e Printer driver features Front view DADF document output tray toner cartridge 9 scanner lid imaging unit Control panel a The symbol is a mark for the optional device Rear view Extension telephone socket USB memory port O EXT Telephone line socket Power switch LINE USB port Power receptacle network port Finisher output tray Stacker 4 Stapler 600 DADF document width Side cover guides DADF cover Multi purpose tray Output support Front cover Tray 1 Multi purpose tray extension Optional tray Multi purpose tray paper width guides dumm
269. professional users lt Back Cancel 5 The list of printers available on the network appears Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next Select Printer Port en Select a port that will be used for your printer Local or TCP IP Port Shared Printer UNC Add TCP IP Port Select a printer from the list below IF you don t see your printer below click Update to refresh the list IP Port Name Update Set IP Address lt Back Next gt Cancel e f you do not see your printer on the list click Update to refresh the list or select Add TCP IP Port to add your printer to the network To add the printer to the network enter the port name and the IP address for the Installing Printer Software in Windows printer To verify your printer s IP address or the MAC address print a Network Configuration page e To find a shared network printer UNC Path select Shared Printer UNC and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button NOTE f you cannot find your machine in network please turn off the firewall and click Update For Windows operating system click Start Control Panel and start windows firewall and set this option unactivated For other operating system refer to its on line guide TIP If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network printer click the Set IP Address butt
270. r CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a lanquage from the list below English v Cancel e If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Select Typical installation for a local printer Click Next er Select Installation Type Select type that you want and click Next button a00000000pa0np0n0pasnpennpasapanupannaasasananaunoan0ng ce eae teen for a Install default components for a device that is directly connected to user s ed PER Mas NAN NAG computer r Typical installation for a network printer Install softwares tor a device that is on network C Custom installation You can select installation options This option is recommanded for professional users lt Back Cancel Installing Printer Software in Windows
271. r is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly e Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer e The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off Scanning problems Network Scan problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The scanner does not work e Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DADF e There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate e Check that the printer cable is connected properly e Make sure that the printer cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable e Incase of use of account feature make sure that you have extra scan count remaining For example if you try to scan 10 page document while you have 5 scan count left the scan job would be canceled cannot find a scanned image file You can check the destination for the scanned file on the Advanced page in the Network Scan program s Properties screen cannot find the scanned image file after scanning e Check if the scanned file is on your computer e Check Send image immediately to the specified folder using an associated default application on
272. r turning on the machine or waking up from the Power Save For example if you select Fax as a default window the first window will be the Basic tab of the Fax feature In case you want to show ID Copy as a default window you need to enable this feature in Default Option previously e Default Option Changes all the default values for copying faxing emailing scanning and paper at once See Changing the default settings on page 30 e Home Changes the order of windows that will appears on the display screen Default Settings 77 Depending on the optional kit you installed or the category you selected the selectable options on the display screen may differ Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit to use mm or inch and set the numeric separation comma or period OPTION DESCRIPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION Contention Management This feature lets you to select the priority between copy jobs and print jobs e Priority Set the priority by numbering the job The machine starts from the least to the highest number in order e First In First Out The machine does an asked job in order Timers The machine cancels a printing job if data does not be received in specific time e System Timeout The machine returns to the default value after certain time the machine waits You can set a time for maximum 10 minutes e Held Job Timeout The machine holds a job for
273. rescribed service condition WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons DANGER VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION PERIGO GEVAAR ADVARSEL ADVARSEL VARNING VAROITUS x zx CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE LESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO RADIACAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE FEEFEE MERONE 0 SHE SH Aoao See ULER FAKAS OZONE
274. ress Select Press USB Print Press Start on the control panel 72 Using USB memory device using document box This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine This chapter includes e About Document Box e Understanding the Document box screen ABOUT DOCUMENT BOX The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the hard drive Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as print fax e mail or an FTP SMB server The Document Box provides three types of boxes public Secured a and common a The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to public boxes The secured box can be created with password by all users This means that the only users who know the password can access to the box and store their data A common box is provided by default Users cannot create edit and delete the common box When a user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box i e fax receiving or PC printing in store mode the data will be stored in the common box by default You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in delayed mode printing proof page UNDERSTANDING THE DOCUMENT BOX SCREEN To use the Document Box feature press Document Box on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press EH to go to the Main screen 2 01 01 2
275. restriction 10 After adding segments press Send All 52 Scanning Setting up an email account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 5 Click Settings gt Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 7 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 8 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication 9 Enter the SMTP server login name and password 10 Click Apply If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 gt If SMTP server requires SSL TLS connection enable Secure E mail Connection with SSL TLS Storing email addresses There are two kinds of email addresses Local on your machine s memory and Global on the LDAP server which differ depending on where they are stored
276. rinting with paper in tray2 e Auto Continue When the paper is mismatched meaning that tray 1has filled with the letter size paper but the printing job needs A4 size paper the machine will wait for 30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized paper After 30 seconds the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized paper e Paper Substitution When the paper is mismatched this option sets the machine print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice versa e Wide A4 It is useful when printing in DOS mode This option prints 80 charactors in a line which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode Machine Test The machine prints the test image patterns using Image Quality Test Patterns HDD Spooling To spool documents in HDD for the network printing select On Manual Image Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information To activate this feature go to Admin Setting gt the Setup tab gt Optional Service and set the Manual Image Overwrite option to Enable After activating this feature you can overwrite the HDD by pressing Start in the display Stored Job File Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through HDD If the HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it e Rename If the HDD memory already ha
277. rintout Always keep it clean SELECTING PRINT MEDIA You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper K e Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Samsung has no control e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide N Using print media that does not meet thes
278. rintouts to be sorted the Same way as the original the machine places printout sets Slightly offset from one another More Options e Information Page Select Information Page to print a cover sheet containing the printer name the network user ID job name before printing the document When several users send a print job to the printer this option allows you to easily find your documents in the output tray e Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because downloading fonts takes time selecting this option can speed up your printing time When using Printer fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer driver e Save as Form for Overlay Select Save as Form for Overlay to save the document as a form file C FORMOVER FOM Once this option is selected the printer driver requires the file name and the destination path each time you print If you want to preset the file name and specify the path click on the button in the Output to area and type the file name and specify th
279. rning message related to the imaging unit but you should have a replacement imaging unit in stock Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size e Imaging unit is worn Replace with new one appears on the display For ordering information for imaging unit See Supplies on page 118 D To prevent damage to the imaging unit do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Replacing the imaging unit 1 Open the side cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a click to release the toner cartridge a a A ih Nix ST Z The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit 5 Pull the used imaging unit out 6 Remove the new imaging unit from its bag 7 Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge 8 Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric N Do not touch the green part midside of the imaging unit Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 9 Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place making sure not to touch the surface of the imaging unit LY CA AAA VAAN 10 Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place Maintenance_ 95 11
280. rom the website on page 96 5 Click Security gt Network Security gt External Authentication Server gt LDAP Server 6 Enter LDAP server and Port Enter optional information 8 Click Apply Z The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the operating systems i Entering email addresses by the address book Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book you can simply enter email addresses 1 Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email Naa agagagdggagaa Pe free fred rede ire fre ed e The search window shows 2 Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for Or press Search to specify the search criteria Individual From E ID E mail A m Sarinl Sarin1 siso com Search ae Sarin2 Sarin2 siso com 7 Pit Sarin3 Sarin3 siso com X Sarin4 Sarin4 siso com Sarin5 Sarin5 siso com Sarin6 Sarin6 siso com Zv When the search is completed the screen displays the search results 3 Press From and enter your email address and press OK 4 Select the address you want in the right hand pane and the press To Cc or Bcc in the left hand pane 5 Press Apply Keep selecting addresses as many as you want 6 Press OK Entering email addresses by the keyboard When you press the input field in the From To
281. rrent copy job press Stop on the control panel Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the control panel Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY On the Basic tab of the Copy screen you can select copy features before starting to copy Z The Basic tab setting is only for each copy That means that the setting does not apply to the next copy job After finishing the current copy job the machine automatically restores the default settings after certain time Or the machine resume to default setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting See General settings on page 80 Changing the size of originals Press the Basic tab gt Original Size then use left right arrows to set the original size Press more to see the detail values Ready Te 2 sa Copies 001 Copying gt Original Size Custom 148 356 mm is e2 O AB DE a o 98 216 mm at 216 mm E A4 bond Letter Lx e Custom Selects the scanning area of the original Press the cardinal point arrows to set the size e Auto Automatically detects the size of originals but this option supports only when originals are Legal Letter or A5 sized If the originals is mixed sized then the machine detects the largest original size and
282. rrow to make the output darker Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Darkness Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then press OK Light Dark eel CODD Erase Background You can lighten reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning colored paper or newspaper originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Erase Background Select the appropriate option and press OK e Off Disables this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance The higher the number is the more vivid the background IS e Erase The higher the number is the lighter the background is Scan to Edge You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is Usually the machine scans a page except edges which means the margin especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray But if you scan and sent it right away via the network as the file the machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Image tab gt Scan to Edge Select On and press OK Quality You can use this option to produce a high quality document Higher quality you select a larger file size you get Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Quality J E Normal a Draft When you set Color Mode to Mono the Quality option is grayed out Scan Preset This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job Press USB g
283. rties Window Printing a Document Printing from Applications There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 2 4 From the application you are using select Print from the File menu Select Print directly using Ipr In the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and click Properties Location Description Status idle accepting jobs Set as Default m Page Selection All pages C Even pages C Odd pages C Some pages E Copies Copies 1 100 1 Ji Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 nter page numbers and or groups of pages to print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 x T ke Click e Text allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns e Graphics allows you to set image options that are used when printing images files such as color options image size or image position e Device allows you to set the print resolution paper source and destination 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the Status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel Printing Files You
284. s Acar for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges A N e Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner cartridge is completely empty e Toner is empty Replace toner cartridg appears on the display e The machine stops printing Incoming faxes are saved in m
285. s the same name when you enter a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on HDD as you store new job information Altitude Adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level This feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height district Higher altitude location need to set this feature to High 3 which affects print quality Country You can change the country then some the values for fax and paper size will be changed automatically for your country After installing the fax kit you must change the country Output Options Output Options is for when the staples run out you to let the machine stop processing and wait to refill the staples or continue the job If you set Within Job Offsetting to On the output paper is placed and sorted by printout sets Home Window Background To change the background image of the machine s LCD UI to suit user s preference press Custom select a customized background image file on the list and then press Load Users can register their own background image from SyncThru Web Service Click Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Home Window Customization and add your images on the list Machine status and advanced setup_ 81
286. s the device Standard Accounting only Refers to the Standard Account List from SyncThru Web Service gt Security gt User Access Control gt Accounting See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 Network Accounting only Refers to the user information in network authentication server Registering local authorized users 1 2 Pr p e e e 8 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service for your machine Log in to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 Select Security gt User Access Control gt Authentication gt Authentication Method Select Local Authentication Click on the Apply button Click on Authority and check a Role Name according to the current user s role You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button Click on User Profile and check the users You can add users by clicking the Add button If you want add information to the Address Book check the Automatically add your information to Address Book Select the user s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated Select the user s role from Role item Click on Apply Register authorized network users 1 2 3 4 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser and click on Go to access the SyncThru Web Service of your machine Log in to the SyncThru
287. scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP e On The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or failed e Off No report is printed after completing a job e On Error Only in case of error occurrence the machine prints the report Z You can also print machine s status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service Open the web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information 90 _Machine status and advanced setup maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Finding the serial number Sending the toner reorder notification Sending the imaging unit reorder notification Checking Document Box PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT See Printing a report on page 89 MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE If you want to view the supply life indicators follow the next step 1 2 3 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Machine Status Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage remaining FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER If you want to check your serial number from the screen follow the next steps 1 2 Press Machine Setup on the control panel Press Machine Status gt the Machine Info tab gt Machine Details SENDING
288. select the largest sized paper in the tray Copying_ 41 e Mixed Size Letter amp Legal Allows for the use of both of Letter and Legal sized papers together and the machine uses the proper sized paper from several trays For example if the originals are total 3 pages 1st page is the letter sized paper 2nd page is the legal sized paper and 3rd page is the letter sized paper then the machine prints the output first letter legal and letter in order from several trays e Other preset values Allows user to easily select commonly used values Reducing or enlarging copies Press the Basic tab gt Reduce Enlarge then use left right arrows to reduce or enlarge an image on the paper Press more to see the values DN Ready To Copy Copies 001 NG Copying gt Reduce Enlarge e5 fi m Original 100 LGL gt Aa 83 E kaa A4 2A6 7196 Custom 25 400 100 gt LGL gt LTR 78 A4 9LTR 9495 ay KI e Original 100 Prints texts or images the same size as originals e Auto Fit Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the output paper e Other preset values Allows you to easily select commonly used values Z The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is placed In the DADF 25 200 adjustment is possible And in the scanner glass 25 400 adjustment is possible Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Press the Basic tab gt Duplex then use lef
289. selected System Box Type Box Name Owner Date File il First First 27 11 2008 25 A Second Second 27 11 2008 26 a Third Third 27 11 2008 27 Ca Fourth Fourth 27 11 2008 28 bine Fifth Fifth 27 11 2008 29 a 27 11 2008 Free Space 637 MB Total 8000 GB Detail 4 1 Enter e User Box tab Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed sent by email or scanned When you create a box you can set the password to secure your box The box with a password is called Secured Box and without it it is called public box e System Box tab The machine provided default boxes which you cannot modify them Type Shows the box is secured or not Box Name Shows the box name Owner Shows the user name of a box Date Shows the date of a box created File Shows the number of total files in the box Add Lets you add more boxes Delete Deletes the selected box Edit Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name Detail Shows box information Search Searches a box with a box name or an owner name Enter Prints or sends the stored file in the box Total 10 Boxes Selected 0 Box Delete Edit CLEANING YOUR MACHINE To maintain print and scan quality follow the cleaning procedures below each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur A N e Cleaning the cabinet of the mach
290. sparency copying When you prepare transparencies for presentations use this feature to copy the information Z Before you start this special copy job set the tray s Paper Types and Paper Size to Transparency See Setting the paper size and type on page 39 gt Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 32 Load the right sized transparencies into the tray you have set Set the paper type to Transparency Press Copy from the Main screen Press the Advanced tab gt Transparencies Select Transparencies option e No Separator Does not place separator sheets between transparencies e Blank Sheet Places a blank sheet between transparencies e Printed Sheet Places the same image on the divider sheets as printed on the transparency 7 Select media sources in case you selected either Blank Sheet or Printed Sheet o MI ee VP 8 Press OK 9 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Erasing edges You can copy the original without any edges or margins 1 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Or load the Originals face up in the DADF See Loading originals on page 32 2 Press Copy from the Main screen 3 Press the Image tab gt Erase Edge 4 Select the appropriate option e Off Disables this feature e Border Erase Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies e Sma
291. specifications optional Item Description Imaging unit Approx 80 000 pages yield Memory 256 MB max 512 MB External 633 x 506 x 641 mm 24 92 x 19 92 x 25 23 inches dimension without optional trays W x D x H Weight 44 85 Kg including consumables Package weight Paper 5 4 Kg Plastic 1 2 Kg a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 b Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment rinting interval media type and media size _ ae c May be affected by operating environment optional printing interval media type and media size PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS Consumables 2 piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system Power rating 110 127 VAC or 220 240 VAC See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Item Description Printing method Laser Beam Printing Printing speed Up to 53 ppm in A4 55 ppm in Letter Power e Average operation mode Less than 900 W consumption e Power save mode Less than 85 W e Stand by mode Less than 120 W Duplex printing speed Up to 50 ipm in A4 52 ipm in Letter Noise level e Standby mode Less than 30 dBA e Printing mode Less than 55 dBA e Copying mode Less than 57 dBA First print out time 8 seconds from ready Print resolution Up to 1
292. ssage shows only when the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service 4 Press NetScan 5 When the authentication message pops up enter ID and Password ID and Password that are which you have entered during the configuration of the Network Scan program See Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager NetScan on page 53 When login is completed the screen shows the NetScan server address which is the networked computer Additionally this shows Application list that is configured in Samsung Network Scan Manager 6 Select one from the application list and press Select Press Start on the control panel to start scanning 8 The original will be scanned and sent to your computer mi SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB FTP SCAN TO SERVER You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP Preparation for scanning to SMB FTP Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file 4 The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web Service and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Address Book Click Add Enter a name and speed number Check Add SMB Enter the server addr
293. sung com 4004 0000 BULGARIA 07001 33 11 normal tariff www samsung com CAMEROON 7095 0077 www samsung com CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ca 726 7864 English www samsung com ca _ fr French CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com From mobile 02 482 82 00 CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish COTE D LVOIRE 8000 0077 www samsung com CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG 062 726 7864 www samsung com CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from www samsung com landline CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak s r o Oasis Florenc Sokolovska 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish EGYPT 08000 726786 www samsung com EIRE 0818 717100 www samsung com EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com lat in_en English www samsung com lat in Spanish ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com FINLAND 09 85635050 www samsung com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com GERMANY 0180 5 SAMSUNG bzw www samsung com 0180 5 7267864 0 14 Min aus dem dt Festnetz aus dem Mobilfunk max 0 42 Min GEORGIA 0 800 555 555 www samsung com GHANA 0800 100
294. switch the screen and press Tray Management Select tray and its options such as paper size and type Press OK If the optional tray is not installed the tray options on the screen is grayed out NOs Getting Started_ 29 Changing the default settings You can set the default values for copy fax email scan and paper all at once 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab gt Default Settings gt Default Option 5 Press the function you want to change and change its settings General Print Report Device Info a Default i E Wind Copy mm Scan to Server Date amp Time ae Default Settings Default Option Fax Paper Size Measurements Ti m Home Home Window imers i Vv EF For example if you want to change the default setting of the brightness amp darkness for a copy job press Copy gt Darkness and adjust the brightness amp darkness 6 Press OK Using the SetIP program This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface Especially it helps the network administrator set several network IPs at the same time The following procedure is based on windows XP If you use Macintosh or Li
295. t 6 Select 1st Page only Size Position Darkness of options Press OK 8 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying Tie 2 TO pa Copying_ 47 Overlay copying If you scan and store the data such as format you can copy the original with the previously stored data eS ee a Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals and print media on page 32 Press Copy from the Main screen Select the tray in Paper Supply Press the Advanced tab gt Overlay Press List Select a file name Select a overlay option e New Makes the new overlay When the file name pops up enter the file name e Detail Shows information of the selected overlay Edit Modifies the name of the selected overlay Delete Deletes the selected overlay Apply Prints the originals with the selected overlay Print Prints the selected overlay e Cancel Cancels overlay options you have selected Press Start on the control panel to begin copying If you have selected option New in step 7 the machine starts storing the new overlay by pressing the Start button Auto crop copying The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin Se 2 AIN IY pa Place the originals face up in the DADF Or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loadi
296. t Fax Send Report Faxing Optional 65 4 Press On Admin Setting bo nd General Print Report Print lt m Multi Send Fax Send LJ Or eport eport Accounting Reports Gi U p Fax Send Report Repot m On Appearance i Fax Sent Received i On Error Report Ww 5 Press OK SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone fee If you send a fax after setting this feature fax data will be stored in machine s memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side Press Toll Save Press On oo o Admin Setting Naya General Print Report Copy Setup m Off E Start Time Fax Setup Network Setup On 7 E End Time Authentication Optional Service Vv CoC 7 Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left right arrows 8 Press OK 9 Press End Time and set the end date and time with left right arrows 10 Press OK 11 Press OK ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY FAX JOB You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Machine Setup on
297. t Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt Scan Preset Sharing and ger Jo Mm Sal __ Simple Scan _ Archival Record mm Custom e Sharing and Printing Produces a small sized file for normal quality documents e High Quality Printing Set this option for high quality output with the largest file size e Archival Record For the electronic file which is of the smallest file size of the output e OCR Produces scanned output for OCR software You can expect the highest quality images e Simple Scan Used for a simple document with text only The file size of output is small e Custom Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen File Format You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job Press USB gt Scan to USB gt the Output tab gt File Format mm PDF JPEG Single Page ee Jae Multi Page TIFF e PDF Scans originals in PDF format e Single Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e Multi Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as several file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format e BMP Scans original in BMP format The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode File Policy You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through USB If the USB memory already has the sa
298. t in the office The person who wants to receive the document calls the machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the document be sent In other words it polls the machine holding that has the original To use this feature both the sender and receiver must have the polling feature The polling process is as follows 1 Sender stores the originals in the machine See Storing the originals for polling on page 65 2 Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver 3 Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when requested See Polling a remote fax on page 65 4 Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax Storing the originals for polling 1 Press Fax from the Main screen 2 Place the originals face up in the DADF Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down 3 Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab Press the Advanced tab gt Polling gt Store 5 Press the input area then the pop up keyboard enter Passcode The four digit number which you have to inform the receiver If you do not want to set Passcode enter number 0000 here Then you can store delete print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode gt 6 Select the Delete On Poll option If you select Off the sent fax data will be remained in the machine s memory even after it s printing If you select On the fax data will be deleted at the printing po
299. t 13 fit to page 21 from Macintosh 43 from Windows 13 N up Macintosh 45 Windows 19 overlay 23 poster 22 PRN 14 scaling 21 watermark 22 print resolution 37 printer driver install Linux 32 printer properties Linux 36 printer properties set Macintosh 43 Windows 14 24 printer resolution set Windows 16 printer software install Macintosh 40 Windows 5 uninstall _ Windows 12 printing booklets 20 double sided 21 from Linux 36 R resolution printing 37 S scanning Linux 37 TWAIN 29 WIA driver 29 scanning from Macintosh 46 setting darkness 16 favorites 18 image mode 16 resolution Windows 16 toner save 16 true type option 16 software Install Macintosh 40 Windows 5 reinstall Windows 11 system requirements Macintosh 40 uninstall Windows 12 status monitor use 30 T toner save set 16 TWAIN scan 29 U uninstall software Windows 12 uninstalling MFP driver Linux 33 W watermark create 22 delete 22 edit 22 print 22 WIA scan 29 51
300. t System Timeout e You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour 7 Select On 8 Select a duration using left right arrows 9 Press OK on Using energy saving feature The machine provides energy saving features 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab 5 Press down arrow to switch the screen press Power Saver 6 Select appropriate option and time General Print Report Language A Scan Power Power Saver pas Tray Management Low Power Save Altitude Ww l4 fly e Scan Power Save Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass e Low Power Save Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under 100 C and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan for the fuser unit e Power Save Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after certain time 7 Press OK Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job See General settings on page 80 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to
301. t right arrows to select Duplex value If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides of originals the message Another Page appears after the first page copied At this time load the original s the other side facing down and press Yes then the machine starts scanning the second page of your original Press more to see the detail values e 1 51 Sided Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of the paper this function produces exactly the same print out from originals e 1 52 Sided Scans one side of originals and prints them on both sides of the paper Ei 42 Copying 1 gt 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 Scans one side of the originals and prints on both sides of the paper but the information on the back side of the print out is rotated 180 2 gt 1 Sided both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet 2 gt 7 Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals 2 gt ri Sided Rat Side 2 Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 ral Reverse 1 gt 2 Sided Scans originals and prints them on both sides of a paper But the machine reverses the print out order of the originals The machine prints the second original first which means the firstly input original
302. t tab Properties Tab Properties Configuration Exit Workform Name Sending weekly report H Delay Start Off Y Expired Off Secured On Workform Name Sets the workform name Delay Start Schedule the start date and time to start Expired Sets the expire date Secured Locks the workform with password protection Previous Goes to the next tab Using standard workflow 77 VARIOUS OPERATIONS WITH WORKFORM User can operate various jobs with workforms The following items show some example cases Scan to multi destination You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such as email SMB FTP server document box and print 4 Before you add module make sure that the parameters are correctly configured for each module e Fax See Preparing to fax on page 59 e Email Server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 Fax forwarding You can forward the received fax to another destinations To forward a fax your machine checks caller s ID that the fax service provides When the caller is also Samsung s fax machine your machine checks the fax number that the user defined for the machine information Z Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup gt Admin Setting gt Setup tab gt Standard Workflow Management See Standard Workflow Management on page 89 When you need to forward different destination for each ca
303. tab Machine Info tab Continued Usage Counters Total Impressions Black Impressions Black Copied Impressions Black Printed Impressions Sheets Copied Sheets Black Copied Sheets Printed Sheets Black Printed Sheets 2 Sided Sheets Copied 2 Sided Sheets Machine Info tab Machine Info tab Continued Black Copied 2 Sided Sheets Printed 2 Sided Sheets Black Printed 2 Sided Sheets Analog Fax Sheets Analog Fax 2 Sided Sheets Fax Image Received Analog Fax Images Sent Analog Fax Images Received Images Sent Network Scanning Images Sent Continued Email Images Sent Maintenance Impressions Black Maintenance Impressions Introduction_ 22 Admin Setting General tab Setup tab Print Report tab Page 80 Page 82 Page 89 Device Info Copy Setup Print Date amp Time Fax Setup Accounting Reports Default Settings Network Setup Report Measurement Authentication Timers Optional Service Language Document Box Power Saver Management Tray Management Standard Workflow Altitude Adjustment Management Output Option Contention Management Sound Supplies Management Machine Test Manual Image Overwrite HDD Spooling Stored Job File Policy Country Multi Bin Stamp Usage Page Report When the display Are you sure you want to print it shows press Yes Job Status button This menu shows the job in process in waiting in completed and the notice message such as an error See Job Stat
304. tandard j gt Add No C Remove Remove All e Fax number input area Shows the recipient s fax number using the number keypad on the control panel If you configured the phone book press Individual or Group See Setting up a fax phonebook on page 64 e Add No Lets you add more destinations e Deletes the last digit entered c Removes all digits of the selected entry Remove Removes the selected fax number entry Remove All Removes all the fax numbers in the input area Address Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from SyncThru Web Service See Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service on page 65 e Duplex Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the original both sides of the original e Resolution Adjusts the resolution options e Saving to box Sets the machine to save the originals to the document box for later use Z For details about how to use the Document Box refer to the Document Box chapter See Using document box on page 73 Advanced tab Advanced Job Build Off Original Size Auto Delay Send Off Priority Send Off Polling Ez e Job Build Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax transmission See Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission on page 62 e Original Size Selects the size of the original document Press OK to update current setting e Delay Send Sets the machine to send
305. ter User s Guide Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help e If you need to know the exact name of your printer you can check the supplied CD ROM Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing Smart Panel appears automatically showing the error You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X Double click this icon in Windows BO inom Click this icon in Mac OS X A 4 Using Smart Panel 33 Click this icon in Linux lg Ba If you are a Windows user from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs your printer driver name 5 Smart Panel NOTES e If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer first select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your printer name e The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software User s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating System in use The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other information You can also change settings 8 Buy Now TI Troubleshooting Guide Prin
306. ter Setting BP Driver Setting Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s The printer and the number of toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in use Any printers do not have this feature Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge s online Troubleshooting Guide You can view Help to solve problems Driver Setting Only for Windows You can use the printer properties window which allows you to access all of the printer options you need for using your printer For details See Printer Settings on page 14 Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Using the troubleshooting guide you can view solutions for error status problems Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide Using Smart Panel 34 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window Using Your Printer in Linux You can use your machine in a Linux environment This chapter includes e Getting Started e Installing the Unified Linux Driver e Using the Unified Driver Configurator e Configuring Printer Properties e Printing a Document e Scanning a Document Getting Started You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung w
307. ter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display 8 Press OK gt Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email Z If Forward to Server Setting is on this option will be grayed out 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Email Setting gt Receive Forward 6 Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on the display e If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax set the Forward amp Print 7 Press OK gt Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server 7n f Forward to Email Setting is on this option will be grayed out The server setting must K be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this option on 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting When the login message pops up enter password and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 3 Press the Setup tab gt Fax Setup Press down arrow on the right side 5 Press Fax Forward Settings gt Forward to Server Setting gt Send Forward 6 Press On 7 Press OK gt Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server Q I
308. the Advanced page in the Properties screen of the Network Scan program to open the scanned image immediately after scanning I forgot my ID and PIN Check your ID and PIN in the Server page in the Properties screen of the Network Scan program cannot view the Help file To view the Help file you need to have Internet Explorer 4 service pack 2 or above Troubleshooting 113 Fax problems CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS The machine is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working e Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet No dial tone sounds e Check that the phone line is properly connected e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print a Fax Phone Book list See Setting up a fax phonebook on page 64 The original does not feed into the machine e Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed e The DADF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Faxes are not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to Fax e Make sure th
309. the Edit button in the Watermark section The Edit Watermark window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete 4 Click OK until you exit the Print window 5 5 8 gt w A WORLD BEST WORLD BEST Using Overlays What is an Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a New Page Overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay 2 To save the document as an overlay access printer properties See Printing a Document on page 13 3 Click the Extras tab and click Edit button in the Overlay section In the Edit Overlay window click Create Overlay
310. the PostScript options or printer features Using Help You can click from the upper right corner of the window and then click on any setting Using Windows PostScript Driver Using Direct Printing Utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files CAUTION e You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing Depending on how a PDF file was created it may not be able to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program e The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1 4 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it Overview Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your printer without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To installing this program you should select Custom installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver Using Direct Printing Utility 25 Printing There are several ways yo
311. the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms 125 Glossary DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head t
312. the machine s device information and check its current status Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters Change the printer properties Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Your machine s embedded website opens SyncThru Web Service allows administrator to set up the machine If you want to access Settings or Security menu login first Press Login button and enter user ID and password from the pop up window Then press LOGIN button The initial administrator s setting is as follows e The default ID admin e The default password sec00000 troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Tips for avoiding paper jams e Clearing document jams e Clearing paper jams TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs follow the steps outlined on page 97 e Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Loading paper on page 37 e Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tra
313. the necessary tools NOTES e Availabe for Windows OS users only e Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator e Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator To open the program Select Start 5 Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Samsung Easy Document Creator 5 Samsung Easy Document Creator The Samsung Easy Document Creator interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows NOTE The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using tomy Easy Document Creator x EB J Information Quick Scan Click the information button to see the program s version information Click the help button to get the information of any option you want to use Automatically scans with the settings provided in Configuration You can pre set the options such as image type document size resolution or file type Scanning 29 Scan SNS Upload Conversion Provides more in depth options for scanning documents on a one by one basis NOTE Text Converting will only be available after installing the optical character recognition OCR software proivided in a separate installation file e Image Scanning Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures Document Scanning Use f
314. ting When you connect your printer to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the printer After you have assigned and verified the TCP IP settings you are ready to install the software on each computer on the network You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method Typical Installation This is recommended for most users All components necessary for printer operations will be installed l Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on For details about connecting to the network see the supplied printer s User s Guide 2 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The CD ROM should automatically run and an installation window appears If the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your drive and click OK If you use Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start All programs Accessories gt Run and type X Setup exe If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control window 3 Click Next It is strongly recommanded that you quit all Windows applications before running Setup Select a language from the list below English nd Cancel e If necessary select a language
315. ting ID list You can add edit or delete the ID e Login Setting You can configure for user to login either with ID and password ID amp password Login or with ID only ID only Login e Accounting ID List It shows the accounting ID list You can add edit or delete the ID e Login Setting You can configure for user to login either with ID and password ID amp password Login or with ID only ID only Login 86 Machine status and advanced setup User Authentication Method If you are an administrator you can enable authentication service before using the machine to improve security for the device If user authentication service has been activated only authorized users can use the device With authentication service you also can give permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled independently The services refer to the user information differently case by case Using Local Authentication only Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting Refers to User Profile from Security gt User Access Control menu Using Network Authentication only Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting Refers to the user information in the network authentication server Disables the user in User Profile to acces
316. tion about using Image Capture please refer to the Image Capture s help You can also scan using TWAI N compliant softwares such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant softwares Please refer to the user s guide of the software When scanning does not operate in I mage Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS 10 4 7 or higher 49 Using Your Printer with a Macintosh SOFTWARE SECTION NDEX A advanced printing use 19 B booklet printing 20 C canceling scan 29 D document print Macintosh 43 Windows 13 double sided printing 21 Extras properties set 17 E favorites settings use 18 G Graphics properties set 16 H help use 18 24 install printer driver Macintosh 40 Windows 5 installing Linux software 32 L Layout properties set Windows 15 Linux driver install 32 printer properties 36 printing 36 scanning 37 M Macintosh driver install 40 printing 43 scanning 46 setting up the printer 41 MFP driver install Linux 32 N n up printing Macintosh 45 Windows 19 O orientation print 36 Windows 15 overlay create 23 delete 23 print 23 P Paper properties set 15 paper size set 15 print 36 paper source set 37 Windows 15 paper tray set 50 copy 25 paper type set print 36 poster print 20 PostScript driver installing 24 print documen
317. tions includes Multiple Pages per Side Poster Printing and Booklet Printing See Printing a Document on page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties o Ox Layout Paper Graphic Extras About Paper Orientation s E a C Landscape Q Rotate 180 Degrees Layout Options Layout Type Multiple Pages per Side x Pages per Side 1 w Ad at Fit 210 x 297 mm Ce mm C inch Copies 1 Resolution 600 dpi m Favorites Printer Default v ELECTRONICS E Paper Orientation Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on a page Portrait prints across the width of the page letter style e Landscape prints across the length of the page spreadsheet style e Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees Dt A Portrait A Landscape Layout Options Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing e For details see Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper N Up Printing on page 19 e For details see Printing Posters on page 20 e For details see Printing Booklets on page 20 Double sided Printing Double sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper If this option does not appear your printer does not have this feature e For details see Printing on Both Sides of Paper on
318. to the port and status m Selected port Port type USB Device Port is unused g 3 x a Exit e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port Since the MFP device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers address their devices via so called MFP ports The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports Configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device while another block is in use When you install a new MFP device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP s functionality For MFP scanners 1 O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Using Your Printer in Linux 39 Configuring Printer Properties Using the properties window provided
319. to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab gt Date amp Time gt Date amp Time 5 Select date and time using left right arrows Or touch the insert area and use the numeric keypad on the control panel 6 Press OK Z To change the format of date and time press Date Format and Time Format Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display refer to the following steps 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 Press the General tab Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language Select the desired language Press OK ae pie Setting job timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine exits the current location You can set the amount of time the machine will wait 1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel 2 Press Admin Setting 3 When the login message appears enter password with number keypad and press OK See Setting the authentication password on page 29 4 Press the General tab Press Timers 6 Selec
320. to the SyncThru Web Service as an administrator See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 And click Setting gt Machine Settings gt Scan gt Scan Security gt Digital Signature in PDF The Digital Signature can be used in the Scan to Server feature You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect the contents from unauthorized access You can set the encryption level password and access permission such as reading printing or modifying etc The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature See PDF Encryption on page 57 e Single Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file e Multi Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as several file e JPEG Scans original in JPEG format The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for Color Mode PDF Encryption To encrypt your PDF files you need to set up parameters for the encryption level password and access permission etc Z The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature 1 Press Scan gt Scan to Server gt the Output tab gt File Format gt PDF 2 Press PDF Encryption 3 Press On pi Ready Basic Advanced Image Encryption Level Scan Preset lt Highi RC4 128 bit gt Print I lt High quality print gt File Format Owner Password
321. transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description La
322. ts e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing Macintosh e Postscript Printer Description PPD file Use this file to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents e Scanner driver TWAIN driver is available for scanning documents on your machine e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing 24 Introduction PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Printer driver PCL 6 POSTSCRIPT FEATURE WINDOWS WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH Toner save O O O O Machine quality O O O O option Poster printing O X X X Multiple pages O O O 2 4 O 2 4 6 9 per sheet N up 16 Fit to page O O O O printing Scale printing O Xx Xx O Different source for first page Watermark Overlay Duplex Secu Print Scheduled Print Spool Print O Ot OO i OO Oo O O O O O O x X X XI XIX O X X Proof Print OxI OIOI 0 O X X Stapler O O O a The machine with Duplex feature prints both side
323. u can adjust document resolution Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Basic tab gt Resolution Use left right arrows to toggle the values The higher value you select the clear result you get But the scanning time may take longer Resolution lt 300 dpi j gt 100 200 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray The following table shows detailed information feature resolution and file format options FEATURE RESOLUTION DPI FILE FORMAT Scan to Email 100 200 300 400 PDF Single Page TIFF 600 Multi Page TIFF JPEG NetScan 100 200 300 400 PDF TIFF JPEG 600 Scan to Server 100 200 300 400 PDF Single Page TIFF 600 Multi Page TIFF JPEG Original Size You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre defined size or putting in the margin value or Auto If you set this option to Auto the machine senses and determines the size of the original Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server gt the Advanced tab gt Original Size Use up down arrows to go to the next screen Select the appropriate option and press OK 148 356 mm Auto JIS B5 f m AA Letter E 98 216 mm SCIES A5 E Legal mm Statement Scanning 55 Original Type You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a document being scanned Press Scan gt Scan to Email Or Scan to Server
324. u can print using Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility window 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility Or double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The Direct Printing Utility window opens 2 Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you will print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section 4 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the next column 5 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the shortcut icon 1 Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer NOTE If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer opens Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section 2 Customize the printer settings for your needs 3 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the printer Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added 2 Select the printer you will use 3 Customize the printer settings for your needs See the below part 4 Click Print
325. ur machine s specification to view the fusing temperature see page 123 e Letterhead ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect printer rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal sized paper you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray 1 paper length guide 2 paper width guide If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder refer to Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size 1 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length It is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country To load another size hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding position 2 After inserting paper into the tray while pinching the paper width guide as shown move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper When you use legal sized paper you need to extend the length of the tray 3 Load the paper into the tray 4 Place the tray into the machine 5 Set the paper si
326. ures Printer driver Setting up the hardware Setting up the network Supported operating systems Configuring network protocol via the machine System requirements Windows Macintosh Linux Installing the software Machine s basic settings Altitude adjustment China only Setting the authentication password Setting the date and time Changing the display language Setting job timeout Using energy saving feature Setting the default tray and paper Changing the default settings Using the SetIP program Understanding the keyboard Loading originals On the scanner glass In the DADF Selecting print media Specification on print media Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray Loading paper Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder contents COPYING SCANNING In the multi purpose tray Setting the paper size and type Understanding the Copy screen Basic tab Advanced tab Image tab Copying originals Changing the settings for each copy Changing the size of originals Reducing or enlarging copies Copying on both sides of originals Duplex Deciding the form of copy output Collated Staple Selecting the type of originals Changing the darkness Using special copy features Merging multiple jobs as a single copy ID card copying Copying ID with the manual ID copy option 2 up or 4 up copying N up Poster copying Clone copying Book
327. us button on page 20 Current Job tab Completed Job tab Active Notice tab Detail Detail Detail Delete Delete All 23 _Introduction SUPPLIED SOFTWARE After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install OS CONTENTS Windows e Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your printer s features e Postscript Printer Description PPD file Use the PostScript driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language e Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine e Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing e Network Scan This program allows you to scan a document on your machine and save it to a network connected computer e Direct Printing Utility This program allows you to print PDF files directly e SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses IPv6 is not supported by this program Linux e Postscript Printer Description PPD file Use this file to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents e SANE Use this driver to scan documen
328. using On Hook Dial on the control panel Press Fax gt the Image tab gt Color Mode Select option and OK e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white e Color Transmits a fax in color Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually See Sending a fax manually On Hook Dial on page 61 SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK Use this feature to store destination names fax numbers and transmission settings in your machine There are two options Individual and Group Individual Group e Individual Stores up to 500 fax numbers And the fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No e Group Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to several destinations You can store up to 100 group dial numbers Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list on the Basic tab of Fax Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of many Individual entries The fax numbers which are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No Storing individual fax numbers Speed Dial No 1 Press Fax gt the Basic tab gt Individual Ready to Fax e f Individual Speed Dial Noa D I Fax No la 199 12345 E 024 Delhi 12345 023 Singapore 12345 022 Ooty 12345 021 Germany 12345 020 Er 12345 lw Edit Changes the ID Speed Dial No and Fax No New Creates the new Speed Dial No Delete Deletes the selected Spee
329. using serious damage Your machine should never be placed on near or over a radiator heater air conditioner or ventilation duct Do not allow anything to rest on the power Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings They may touch dangerous voltage points creating a risk of fire or shock Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble the machine Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used 13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions When any part of the power cord plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed If liquid has been spilled into the machine If the machine has been exposed to rain or water If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed If the machine has been dropped or the cabinet appears damage
330. w makes it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job workform Once you create a workform you can reuse the same workflow only with one touch operation INPUT TRANSMIT Email Scan FTP SMB server Document Box Document Box Fax Print Fax UNDERSTANDING THE STANDARD WORKFLOW SCREEN To use the Standard Workflow feature press Standard Workflow on the Main screen Z To switch to the other display screen press the left or right arrow on the display screen Y 01 01 2008 12 00 AM Copies 001 A o p ee Toner Info LCD Brightness English e Various Operations with Workform Workflow Screen Favorite Tab Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform You can select a frequently used public or private workform and then the workform appears on the favorite workform tab Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite workform Public My Workform Workform e Execute Start the job defined in the workform My Workform and Public Workform Tab 2 Ready Favourite My Workform Word orm Q Filter Input E3 Sean B Fax Box Transmit v pad Email Sanjay 2 Box i Fax Sanjay 3 2 Fax CI Box Sanjay 4 ES Scan CDI Box Sanjay 1 Server Print ww paan Sanjay 5 Selected 1 Total 16 Work
331. ware section e Email You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 51 e FTP You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 e SMB You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server on page 54 49 Scanning e Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager NetScan e Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to Server e Changing the scan feature settings UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN To use the scanning feature press Scan on the Main screen If the screen displays an other menu press EJ to go to the Main screen 01 01 2008 12 00 AM Copies 001 AN Toner Info LCD Brightness English If the message asking Auth ID and Password it means the network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web Service See Managing your machine from the website on page 96 Press Scan to Email NetScan or Scan to Server e Scan to Email Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination by email See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 51 e NetScan Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the Network Scan program See Scanning originals and sending vi
332. xt to proceed with uninstalling the driver Press Cancel to leave the driver intact Next gt Cancel 5 Click Finish Using Your Printer in Linux Using the Unified Driver Configurator Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Printer or MFP devices Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions There is also a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I O channel After installing the Unified Linux driver the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator 2 Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration window r Printers configuration Printers Configuration button wg Pints casses ____ ag Refresh Scanners Configuration button e3 kaawaan Remove Printer Ports Configuration button eve Set as Default Stop est Properties About Help Selected printer Local printerfidle Model URI
333. y Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 39 e Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray e If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5 B5 sized paper Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the tray If load the paper this way printing both sides of the paper Duplex is not supported In the printer properties window set the page orientation to be rotated 90 degrees See Software section CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS When an original jams while passing through the DADF the warming message appears on the display screen N To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document gently and slowly D To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DADF 97 Troubleshooting e Understanding display messages e Solving other problems 2 Open the DADF cover Z If you see no paper in this area refer to Roller misfeed See Roller misfeed on page 98 4 Close the DADF cover Then reload the pages you removed if any in the DADF Misfeed of exiting paper 1 Remove the rem
334. y Italia France Sweden Denmark Finland Austria Switzerland Belgium Hungary HOW TO PURCHASE To order Samsung authorized supplies or accessories contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine or visit www samsungprinter com and select your country region to obtain information on calling for technical support Ordering supplies and accessories_ 119 installing accessories Your machine is a full featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs Recognizing that each user may have different requirements however Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine s capabilities This chapter includes Precautions to take when installing accessories Installing a memory DIMM PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING ACCESSORIES Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk arou
335. y of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer B Presets Standard B Paper FH Paper Type Printer Default i L 7 PDFw Preview Cancel Print Mac OS 10 4 47 Printer Features This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and adjusting print quality Select Printer Features from the Presets drop down list to access the following features Printer B Presets Standard B Printer Features H Reverse Duplex Printing Fit to Page Prompt User i Hi RGB Color Standard B PDFv Preview Cancel Print Mac OS 10 4 Reverse Duplex Printing Allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order Fit to Page This setting allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document Using Your Printer with a Macintosh Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages l From
336. y for FDI Foreign Device Interface finisher cover Stacker amp Stapler 6 Stand Scanner lock switch 15 pin Finisher connection Stacker 4 Stapler o O cow OS finisher Stacker 4 Stapler 8 DADF document input tray He FB PO HAB BEB Scanner glass a The symbol is a mark for the optional device Introduction_ 18 CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW Machine Setup 1 2D Job Status 2 DD Interrupt ci DEF pag aS amp JKL ko GHI MNA ng 4 B 6 Clear All PQRS WXYZS 8 KA Fod LAL TANG H Clear Redial Pause On Hook Dial CN C 6 Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings See Machine Setup on page 79 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running queued jobs or completed jobs Status Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 21 Display screen Displays the current machine status and prompts during an operation You can set menus easily using the touch screen number keypad Dials fax number and enters the number value for document copies or other options Clear Deletes characters in the edit area Redial Pause In standby mode redials the last number or in edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job Clear All Reverts the
337. ze from your computer K e Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp e If you do not adjust the paper width guides it may cause paper jams LOADING PAPER Loading paper in tray 1 optional tray or optional high capacity feeder Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1 The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib bond plain paper You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to load an additional 520 sheets of paper See Supplies on page 118 Z Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreement 1 To load paper pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the side you want to print facing down 1 Full 2 Empty 2 After loading paper set the paper type and size for the tray 1 See Setting the paper size and type on page 39 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC printing YH e If you experience problems with paper feed place one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray e You can load previously printed paper The printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed Loading originals and print media_ 37 In the multi purpose tray 3 Load t

Samsung ProXpress

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents